This manual describes how to use the Patran interface to MSC Nastran to build and analyze a model with MSC Nastran as the analysis code.

Attribution Non-Commercial (BY-NC)

10K vues

This manual describes how to use the Patran interface to MSC Nastran to build and analyze a model with MSC Nastran as the analysis code.

Attribution Non-Commercial (BY-NC)

- MD Nastran Demonstration Problems 2010
- FATAL Error Code
- Msc Patran Making a Composite Model
- PATRAN Tutorial
- MSC PATRAN - Reference Manual - Fem_modeling
- Finite Element Modelling Techniques in MSC NASTRAN and LS DYNA
- Patran 2010 User's Guide
- 94020356-Ws08B-honeycombsolid.pdf
- Patran 2010 Release Guide
- MSC.Nastran Basic Dynamic Analysis User's Guide
- Nonlinear Analysis Using MSC.nastran
- NASTRAN advanced dynamic analysis user's guide.pdf
- MSC.Nastran 2007 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) User's Guide
- MSC Nastran 2010 Release Guide
- Patran 2008 r1 Interface To MSC Nastran Preference Guide Volume 1: Structural Analysis
- Patran 2008 r1 PCL Reference Manual Volume 1: Function Descriptions
- MD/MSC Nastran 2010 Quick Reference Guide
- Patran 2010 Reference Manual Part 7: XY Plotting
- Patran 2010 Reference Manual Part 1: Basic Functions
- Patran 2010 Reference Manual Part 3: Finite Element Modeling

Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 578

Preference Guide

Volume 1: Structural Analysis

Corporate Europe Asia Pacific

MSC.Software Corporation MSC.Software GmbH MSC.Software Japan Ltd.

2 MacArthur Place Am Moosfeld 13 Shinjuku First West 8F

Santa Ana, CA 92707 USA 81829 Munich, Germany 23-7 Nishi Shinjuku

Telephone: (800) 345-2078 Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87 0 1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku

Fax: (714) 784-4056 Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6 Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN

Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200

Fax: (81) (3)-6911-1201

Worldwide Web

www.mscsoftware.com

Disclaimer

This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with

the terms of such license.

MSC.Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document

without prior notice.

The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not

intended to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC.Software Corporation assumes no

liability or responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information

contained herein.

User Documentation: Copyright 2010 MSC.Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.

This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this

document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC.Software Corporation is prohibited.

The software described herein may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from

MSC.Software suppliers. Contains IBM XL Fortran for AIX V8.1, Runtime Modules, (c) Copyright IBM Corporation 1990-2002,

All Rights Reserved.

MSC, MSC/, MSC Nastran, MD Nastran, MSC Fatigue, Marc, Patran, Dytran, and Laminate Modeler are trademarks or registered

trademarks of MSC.Software Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

NASTRAN is a registered trademark of NASA. PAM-CRASH is a trademark or registered trademark of ESI Group. SAMCEF is

a trademark or registered trademark of Samtech SA. LS-DYNA is a trademark or registered trademark of Livermore Software

Technology Corporation. ANSYS is a registered trademark of SAS IP, Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of ANSYS Inc. ACIS is a

registered trademark of Spatial Technology, Inc. ABAQUS, and CATIA are registered trademark of Dassault Systemes, SA.

EUCLID is a registered trademark of Matra Datavision Corporation. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of Macrovision

Corporation. HPGL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. PTC, CADDS

and Pro/ENGINEER are trademarks or registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or its subsidiaries in the

United States and/or other countries. Unigraphics, Parasolid and I-DEAS are registered trademarks of UGS Corp. a Siemens

Group Company. All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective owners.

P3:V2010:Z:INT-NA:Z: DC-USR-PDF

Contents

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Patran Interface

MD Nastran Pre

ence Guide,

1 Overview

Purpose 2

Using Patran with SOL 700 2

2 Building A Model

Introduction to Building a Model 6

MD Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) 14

MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) 15

Materials 15

Loads and Boundary Conditions 17

Elements and Properties 17

Solution Controls 17

18

Element Creation 18

Element and p-Formulation Properties 19

Loads and Boundary Conditions 19

Analysis Definition 20

Results Import and Postprocessing 20

Potential Pitfalls 21

Adaptive Analysis of Existing Models 21

Coordinate Frames 22

Finite Elements 23

Nodes 23

Elements 24

Multi-point Constraints 27

MPC Types 28

Degrees of Freedom 31

Superelements 48

ii Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library 50

Materials Application Form 50

Material Input Properties Form 52

Material Constitutive Models 53

Linear Elastic 64

Nonlinear Elastic 65

Hyperelastic 66

Elastoplastic 69

Failure 72

Failure 1, Failure 2, Failure 3 73

Creep 75

Viscoelastic 76

Composite 76

Element Properties 78

Element Properties Form 78

Coupled Point Mass (CONM1) 82

Grounded Scalar Mass (CMASS1) 84

Lumped Point Mass (CONM2) 85

Grounded Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D) 87

Grounded Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D) 89

Bush 90

General Section Beam (CBAR) 93

P-Formulation General Beam (CBEAM) 98

Curved General Section Beam (CBEND) 101

Curved Pipe Section Beam (CBEND) 104

Lumped Area Beam (CBEAM/PBCOMP) 106

Tapered Beam (CBEAM) 110

General Section Beam (CBEAM) 115

General Section Rod (CROD) 122

General Section Rod (CONROD) 125

Pipe Section Rod (CTUBE) 127

Scalar Spring (CELAS1/CELAS1D) 128

Scalar Damper (CDAMP1/CDAMP1D) 130

Viscous Damper (CVISC) 132

Gap (CGAP) 133

Scalar Mass (CMASS1) 135

PLOTEL 137

(Scalar) Bush 137

Spot Weld Connector (CWELD) 141

Fastener Connector (CFAST) 143

Standard Homogeneous Plate (CQUAD4) 146

Revised Homogeneous Plate (CQUADR) 149

CONTENTS iii

Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP) 154

Revised Laminate Plate (CQUADR/PCOMP) 157

Standard Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4) 159

Revised Equivalent Section Plate (CQUADR) 162

P-Formulation Equivalent Section Plate (CQUAD4) 165

Field Point Mesh (CQUAD4/TRIA3)(Exterior Acoustics) 168

Standard Bending Panel (CQUAD4) 170

Revised Bending Panel (CQUADR) 172

P-Formulation Bending Panel (CQUAD4) 174

Standard Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX6) 177

PLPLANE Axisymmetric Solid (CTRIAX, CQUADX) 178

2D Axi-Symmetric Laminated Solid Composite 179

Standard Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 181

Revised Plane Strain Solid (CQUADR) 182

P-Formulation Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 184

Infinite (Exterior Acoustic Element)(CACINF3/CACINF4) 186

2D Plane Strain Laminated Solid Composite 187

Standard Membrane (CQUAD4) 188

Revised Membrane (CQUADR) 190

P-Formulation Membrane (CQUAD4) 192

Shear Panel (CSHEAR) 195

Solid (CHEXA) 197

P-Formulation Solid (CHEXA) 199

Hyperelastic Plane Strain Solid (CQUAD4) 201

Hyperelastic Axisym Solid (CTRIAX6) 202

Hyperelastic Solid (CHEXA) 204

3D Laminate Solid (CHEXA) 205

Cross Section Definition 207

Create Action 207

Supplied Functions 209

Cross Section Orientation 210

Cross Section End Offsets 212

Stiffened Cylinder Example 212

Loads & Boundary Conditions Form 214

Object Tables 221

Preview Rigid Body Motion 230

Slideline (SOL 400 and SOL 600) 230

Deformable Body (SOL 400, SOL 600, and SOL 700 ) 231

Select Discontinuities Subform 231

iv Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Select Contact Area 232

Select Exclusion Region 232

Select Deactivation Region 232

Rigid Body (SOL 600 and SOL 700 only) 233

Contact 239

Rotor Dynamics Form 241

Spin Profile Form 242

Spin History Form 242

Unbalance Form 243

Unbalance Properties Form 245

3 Running an Analysis

Review of the Analysis Form 250

Analysis Form 251

Overview of Analysis Job Definition and Submittal 253

External Superelement Specifications 258

Numbering Options 258

Select File 260

Linear Static 267

Nonlinear Static 269

Normal Modes 272

Buckling 277

Complex Eigenvalue 281

Frequency Response 286

Transient Response 289

Nonlinear Transient 292

Implicit Nonlinear 294

Solver Options Subform (SOL 600) 296

Contact Parameters Subform 297

CONTENTS v

Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600) 307

Domain Decomposition 308

DDAM 311

DDAM in Patran 312

Explicit Nonlinear 316

Sol700 Parameters Subform 317

Hourglass Setting Subform 319

Merge Rigid Material Subform 321

Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform 323

Damping Per Property Subform 325

Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform 327

Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform 330

Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform 332

Eulerian Parameters Subform 333

SPH Control Parameters Subform 336

Results Output Format 338

ADAMS Preparation 340

Subcases 344

Deleting Subcases 345

Editing Subcases 346

Linear Static Subcase Parameters 348

Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters 349

Arc-Length Method Parameters 351

Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters 352

Normal Modes Subcase Parameters 354

Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters 356

Transient Response Subcase Parameters 357

Frequency Response Subcase Parameters 360

Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters 365

Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type 366

Implicit Nonlinear Normal Modes Subcase Parameters 367

Implicit Nonlinear Buckling Subcase Parameters 367

Implicit Nonlinear Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters 368

Implicit Nonlinear Creep Subcase Parameters 370

Implicit Nonlinear Body Approach Subcase Parameters 371

Implicit Nonlinear Complex Eigenvalue Subcase Parameters 372

Load Increment Parameters 373

Iteration Parameters 381

Contact Table 386

vi Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Edge Contact Subform 391

392

Active/Deactive Elements 392

Break Squeal Parameters 393

Solvers/Options 394

DDAM Subcase Parameters 397

Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters 399

Contact Table 401

Additional Contact Data 402

Adaptive Mesh Post-Processing 403

Additional Information 403

Basic Output Requests 406

Advanced Output Requests 407

Edit Output Requests Form 416

Default Output Request Information 418

Subcases Direct Text Input 421

SOL 600 Output Requests 422

DDAM Output Requests 428

Mode by Mode Output 429

Optimize 450

Toptomize 452

Objectives & Constraints 453

Optimization Control 454

Design Domain 456

Postprocessing 459

Assumptions 460

Scenario 1 460

Scenario 2 460

The Process 461

Miscellaneous 461

CONTENTS vii

Select Modal Results .DBALL 463

Loading Form 464

Create a Field Form 466

Output Selection Form 467

Define Frequencies Form 467

4 Read Results

Accessing Results 470

Results File Formats 471

Output2 Formats 471

XDB Formats 471

MASTER Formats 472

T16/T19 Formats 473

3dplot Formats 473

Translation Parameters 474

OUTPUT2 474

Defining Translation Parameters for DDAM (SOL 187) 475

XDB 476

MASTER 477

T16/T19 479

Results 480

Global Variables 486

Coordinate Systems 487

Projected Global System 487

XY Plots 487

Model Data 488

Nodal Results 494

Elemental Results 501

Review of Read Input File Form 524

Read Input File Form 525

Entity Selection Form 526

viii Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Selection of Input File 529

Summary Data Form 529

Reject Card Form 531

Partial Decks 532

Coordinate Systems 532

Referential Integrity 532

Chaining 533

Grids and SPOINTs 533

SPOINTs 533

Referential Integrity 533

Elements and Element Properties 533

PSHELL Properties 537

BAROR and BEAMOR Definitions 537

Fields 537

Referential Integrity 537

Set Name Extensions 537

Materials 538

MPCs 539

Load Sets 540

Fields 541

TABLES 542

Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by IDs 543

Conflict Resolution for Entities Identified by Names 543

6 Delete

Review of Delete Form 546

7 Files

Files 550

8 Errors/Warnings

Errors/Warnings 554

CONTENTS ix

Software Components in Patran MD Nastran 556

Index 561

x Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Chapter 1: Overview

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Overview

1

Purpose 2

MD Nastran Product Information 3

2 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Purpose

1.1 Purpose

Patran is an analysis software system developed and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation. The core

of the system is a finite element analysis pre and postprocessor. Several optional products are available

including; advanced postprocessing programs, tightly coupled solvers, and interfaces to third party

solvers. This document describes one of these interfaces.

The Patran MD Nastran interface provides a communication link between Patran and MD Nastran. It also

provides for the customization of certain features in Patran. The interface is a fully integrated part of the

Patran system.

Selecting MD Nastran as the analysis code preference in Patran, activates the customization process.

These customizations ensure that sufficient and appropriate data is generated for the Patran MD Nastran

interface. Specifically, the Patran forms in these main areas are modified:

• Materials

• Element Properties

• Finite Elements/MPCs and Meshing

• Loads and Boundary Conditions

• Analysis Forms

More information on these topics is contained in Preference Configuration and Implementation (App. A).

The amount of information that needs to be conveyed in the MD Nastran Input file for a SOL 700 analysis

is extensive for even a modest size model. The amount of information and the complexity of most models

makes it virtually impossible to generate the MD Nastran Input file with a text editor alone. Patran

provides a graphical user interface, an extensive line of model building tools that you can use to construct

and view your SOL 700 model, and generate a MD Nastran Input file for SOL 700.

When using Patran as a preprocessor for SOL 700, you are required to specify an analysis code. Selecting

MD Nastran Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) as the analysis code under the Analysis Preference menu,

customizes Patran in five main areas:

• Material Library

• Element Library

• Loads and Boundary Conditions

• MPCs

• Analysis forms

The analysis preference also specifies that the model information be output in the MD Nastran Input

File format.

Chapter 1: Overview 3

MD Nastran Product Information

MD Nastran is a general-purpose finite element computer program for engineering analyses. It is

developed, supported, and maintained by MSC.Software Corporation, 2 MacArthur Place, Santa Ana,

California 92707, (714) 540-8900. See the MD Nastran Reference Manual, Volume 1, for a general

description of MD Nastran’s capabilities.

4 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

MD Nastran Product Information

Chapter 2: Building A Model

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Building A Model

2

Introduction to Building a Model 6

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options 8

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference 18

Coordinate Frames 22

Finite Elements 23

Material Library 50

Element Properties 78

Beam Modeling 207

Loads and Boundary Conditions 214

Load Cases 236

Defining Contact Regions 237

Rotor Dynamics 240

6 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Introduction to Building a Model

There are many aspects to building a finite element analysis model. In several cases, the forms used to

create the finite element data are dependent on the selected analysis code and analysis type. Other parts

of the model are created using standard forms.

The Analysis option on the Preferences menu brings up a form where the user can select the analysis code

(e.g., MD Nastran) and analysis type (e.g., Structural).

The analysis code may be changed at any time during model creation.This is especially useful if the

model is to be used for different analyses in different analysis codes. As much data as possible will be

converted if the analysis code is changed after the modeling process has begun. The analysis option

defines what will be presented to the user in several areas during the subsequent modeling steps.

These areas include the material and element libraries, including multi-point constraints, the applicable

loads and boundary conditions, and the analysis forms. The selected Analysis Type may also affect the

Chapter 2: Building A Model 7

Introduction to Building a Model

allowable selections in these same areas. For more details, see The Analysis Form (Ch. 2) in the

MSC.Patran Reference Manual.

should be set to MD Nastran.

Nastran are Structural, Thermal and Expl

MD Nastran input and output files.

8 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

The following tables summarize all the various MD Nastran commands supported by the Patran MD

Nastran Application Preference. The tables indicate where to find more information in this manual on

how the commands are supported.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 9

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

Table2-1. Description

ASSIGN An ASSIGN command is used to assign a particular name (job name + user specified MD

Nastran results suffix) to the MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file to be created during the analysis.

Table 2-2. Pages

ECHO 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256

SOL 225

TIME 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256

ACCELERATION 250, 253

ACFPMRESULTS 369

ACPOWER 369

ADACT 17, 314

ADAPT 16, 170

DATAREC 17

DISPLACEMENT 230, 241, 250, 253

ELSDCON 230

ESE 230

FORCE 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253

FREQUENCY 250

GPSTRESS 369

INTENSITY 369

MAXLINES 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250, 253, 256

MPCFORCES 369

OLOAD 230, 241, 250, 253

SPCFORCES 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253

STRAIN 230, 235, 241, 248, 250, 253

10 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

Command Pages

ADAPT 16, 170, 225, 233

BEGIN AFPM 147

BEGIN SUPER 219

BCONP 212

BFRIC 212

BFRIC 212

CACINF3 160

CACINF4 160

CBARAO 86

CBAR 86

CBEAM 97, 100

CBEND 93, 95

CDAMP1 82

CDAMP2 219, 438

CELAS1 81

CELAS2 219, 438

CGAP 116

CHEXA 168

CMASS1 119

CMASS2 219, 438

CONM1 76

CONM2 79

CONROD 111

CPENTA 168

CQUAD4 124, 140, 148, 156, 162

CQUAD8 124, 140, 148, 156, 162

CQUADR 131, 142, 150, 157, 163

Command Pages

CROD 110

CSHEAR 166

CTETRA 168

CTRIAX6 153

Chapter 2: Building A Model 11

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

CTUBE 112

CVISC 115

DCONST 416

DOPTPRM 411, 416

DPHASE 188, 190

DRESP1/2 416

DTI, SETREE 309

DYNRED 240

EIGB 243, 238

EIGC 248

EIGR 238

EIGRL 238

EXTSEOUT 222

FEFACE 15

FEEDGE 15

FORCE 190

FREQ1 250

GMBC 188

GRAV 196

MOMENT 190

MAT1 424

MAT2 424

MAT3 424

MAT8 424

MAT9 424

MPC 28

NLPARM 315

OUTPUT 17, 369

PACINF 160

PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,

AUTOSPC 253, 256

PARAM, 230

INREL

PARAM, 230

ALTRED

12 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

COUPMASS 253, 256

PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,

K6ROT 253, 256

PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,

WTMASS 253, 256

PARAM, 230, 233, 235, 241, 245, 250,

GRDPNT 253, 256

PARAM, 233, 256

LGDISP

PARAM,G 245, 250, 253, 256

PARAM,W3 253, 256

PARAM,W4 253, 256

PARAM, POST 219

PBAR 86

PBCOMP 97

PBEAM 100

PBEAM71

PBEAMD

PBELTD

PBEND 93, 95

PCOMP 136, 139

PDAMP 82

PELAS 81

PELAS1

PGAP 116

PLOAD1 199

PLOAD2 191

PLOAD4 191

PLOADX1 191, 149

PLOTEL 120

PLPLANE

PLSOLID

PMASS 119

POINT 15, 170

Chapter 2: Building A Model 13

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

Pages

PROD 110

PSHEAR 166

PSHELL 124, 131, 140, 142, 148, 150,

156, 157, 162, 163

PSHELL1

PSHELLD

PSOLID 168

PSPRMA

PTUBE 112

PBEAM 100

PVAL 15, 170

PVISC 115

RBAR 29

RBE1 31

RBE2 32

RBE3 33

RFORCE 196

RROD 34

RSPLINE 35

RTRPLT 36

SESET 42, 219

SETREE 309

SPC1 188

SPCD 188

TEMP 193

TEMPF 146

TEMPRB 193

TEMPP1 193

TIC 197, 198

TSTEP 253

TSTEPNL 256, 318

14 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

The following Bulk Data entries are supported for SOL 600 analyses.

3D Contact Region

BCBOX* Defines a 3D contact region.

BCHANGE Changes definitions of contact bodies.

BCMATL* Defines a 3D contact region by element material.

BCMOVE Defines movement of bodies in contact.

BCPARA Defines contact parameters.

BCPROP* Defines a 3d contact region by element properties.

BCTABLE Defines a contact table.

BSURF Defines a contact body or surface by element IDs.

GMNURB 3D contact region made up of NURBS.

Initial Conditions

ISTRESS* Defines initial stress values.

MARCIN Insert a text string in MSC.Marc.

MARCOUT Selects data recovery output.

Materials

MATF Specifies material failure model.

MATG* Gasket material properties.

MATHE Hyperelastic material properties.

MATHP Hyperelastic material properties.

MATHED Damage model properties for hyperelastic materials.

MATORT Elastic 3D orthotropic material properties.

MATTEP Thermoelastic-Plastic material properties.

MATTG* Temperature variation of interlaminar materials.

MATTHE Thermo hyperelastic material.

MATTORT* Thermoelastic orthotropic material

MATTVE* Thermo-visco-elastic material properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model 15

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

MATVP Viscoplastic or creep material properties

Note: Solution Control

NLDAMP Defines damping constants.

NLSTRAT Strategy Parameters for nonlinear structural analysis.

PARAMARC Parallel domain decomposition.

RESTART Restart data.

Note:

Note: Element Properties

NTHICK Defines nodal thickness values for beams, plates, and/or shells.

The following Bulk Data entries are supported for SOL 700 analyses.

Materials

MATD001 Isotropic Elastic material for beam, shell and solid.

MATD003 Isotropic and kinematic hardening plasticity.

MATD005 Isotropic materials to model soil and foam.

MATD006 Isotropic viscoelastic material.

MATD007 Isotropic material to model nearly incompressible continuum rubber.

MATD012 Isotropic plasticity for 3D solids.

MATD014 Isotropic materials to model soil and foam with failure.

MATD015 Isotropic Johnson/Cook strain and temperature sensitive plasticity.

MATD019 Isotropic strain rate dependent material.

MATD020 Isotropic rigid material.

MATD022 Orthotropic material with optional brittle failure for composites.

MATD024 Isotropic elasto-plastic material with stress x strain curve and strain rate

dependency.

MATD026 Anisotropic honeycomb and foam material.

MATD027 Isotropic material to model rubber using two variables.

MATD028 Isotropic elasto-plastic material for beam and shell.

16 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

MATD031 Isotropic material to model rubber using the Frazer-Nash formulation.

MATD032 Orthotropic laminated glass material.

MATD057 Isotropic material to model highly compressible low density foams.

MATD058 *MAT_LAMINATED_COMPOSITE_FABRIC

MATD062 Isotropic material to model viscous foams.

MATD063 Isotropic material to model crushable foams.

MATD064 Isotropic elasto-plastic material with a power law hardening.

MATD067 *MAT_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD068 *MAT_NONLINEAR_PLASTIC_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD069 *MAT_SID_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD070 *MAT_HYDRAULIC_GAS_DAMPER_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD071 *MAT_CABLE_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD073 *MAT_LOW_DENSITY_VISCOUS_FOAM

MATD074 *MAT_ELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD076 *MAT_GENERAL_VISCOELASTIC

MATD083 *MAT_FU_CHANG_FOAM

MATD087 *MAT_CELLULAR_RUBBER

MATD093 *MAT_ELASTIC_6DOF_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD094 *MAT_INELASTIC_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD095 *MAT_INELASTIC_6DOF_SPRING_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD097 *MAT_GENERAL_JOINT_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD100 Isotropic spotweld material.

MATD103 Anisotropic viscoplastic material.

MATD119 *MAT_GENERAL_NONLINEAR_6DOF_DISCRETE_BEAM

MATD121 *MAT_GURSON_RCDC

MATD126 *MAT_MODIFIED_HONEYCOMB

MATD20M *MAT_RIGID

MATDB01 *MAT_SEATBELT

MATDS01 *MAT_SPRING_ELASTIC

MATDS02 *MAT_DAMPER_VISCOUS

MATDS03 *MAT_SPRING_ELASTOPLASTIC

MATDS04 *MAT_SPRING_NONLINEAR_ELASTIC

MATDS05 *MAT_DAMPER_NONLINEAR_VISCOUS

Chapter 2: Building A Model 17

Currently Supported MD Nastran Input Options

MATDS06 *MAT_SPRING_GENERAL_NONLINEAR

MATDS07 *MAT_SPRING_MAXWELL

MATDS08 *MAT_SPRING_INELASTIC

MATDS13 *MAT_SPRING_TRILINEAR_DEGRADING

MATDS14 *MAT_SPRING_SQUAT_SHEARWALL

MATDS15 *MAT_SPRING_MUSCLE

TIC3 Defines initial rotational field.

WALL Defines planar rigid wall.

CDAMP1D Scalar damper connection for SOL 700

CELAS1D Scalar spring connection for SOL 700.

Solution Controls

Form Parameters

Execution Control DYSTATIC, DYBLDTIM, DYINISTEP, DYTSTEPERODE,

Parameters DYMINSTEP, DYMAXSTEP, DYSTEPFCTL, DYTERMNENDMAS,

DYTSTEPDT2MS

General Parameters DYLDKND, DYCOWPRD, DYCOWPRP, DYBULKL, DYHRGIHQ,

DYRGQH, DYENERGYHGEN, DYSHELLFORM, DYSHTHICK,

DYSHNIP

Contact Parameters DYCONSLSFAC, DYCONRWPNAL, DYCONPENOPT,

DYCONTHKCHG, DYCONENMASS, DYCONECDT, DYCONIGNORE,

DYCONSKIPTWG

Binary Output DYBEAMIP, DYMAXINT, DYNEIPS, DYNINTSL, DYNEIPH,

Database File DYSTRFLG, DYSIGFLG, DYEPSFLG, DYRLTFLG, DYENGFLG,

Parameters DYCMPFLG, DYIEVERP, DYDCOMP, DYSHGE, DYSTSSZ,

DYN3THDT

18 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference

Nastran Preference

In Version 68 of MSC. Nastran, MSC introduced p-adaptive analysis using solid elements. The Patran

MD Nastran Preference provides support for this new capability. There are some fundamental differences

in approach to model building and results import for p-element analyses; this section will serve as a guide

to these.

MSC .Nastran Version 69 extends the Version 68 capabilities for p-adaptive analysis in two areas. Shell

and beam elements have been added and p-shells and p-beams can be used for linear dynamic solution

sequences. Patran Version 6.0 supports both of these capabilities.

Element Creation

MD Nastran supports adaptive, p-element analyses with the 3D-solid CTETRA, CPENTA, and CHEXA

elements; 2D-solid TRIA, and QUAD elements; shells TRIA, and QUAD elements; beams BAR

elements. Patran and MD Nastran allow TET4, TET10, TET16, TET40, WEDGE6, WEDGE15,

WEDGE52, HEX8, HEX20, and HEX64 for p-adaptive analysis for 3D-solids; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7,

TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9, QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for 2D-

solids and membranes; TRIA3, TRIA6, TRIA7, TRIA9, TRIA13, QUAD4, QUAD8, QUAD9,

QUAD12, and QUAD16 for p-adaptive analysis for shells; BAR2, BAR3, and BAR4 for p-adaptive

analysis for beams. The preferred approach, when beginning a new model, is to use the higher-order

elements--HEX64, WEDGE52, TET40, and TET16, or TRIA13 and QUAD16, or BAR4. The support

for lower-order elements is provided primarily to support existing models. The higher-order cubic

elements allow more accurate definition of the geometry and more accurate postprocessing of results

from the MD Nastran analysis.The translator generates the appropriate MD Nastran FEEDGE and

POINT entities for all curved edges on the p-elements. Models with HEX64 and WEDGE52 elements

are easily created with the Patran Iso Mesher; models with TET16 elements can be created with the Tet

Mesher. Models with QUAD16 and TRIA13 elements can be created using the Iso Mesher or the Paver.

For p-elements, Patran generates cubic edges to fit the underlying geometry. The cubic edge consists of

two vertex grid points and two points in between. Adjacent cubic edges are not necessarily C1

continuous. If the original geometry is smooth, the cubic edges may introduce kinks which cause false

stress concentrations. Then, the p-element produces unrealistic results especially for thin curved shells.

In Version 7 of Patran, for cubic elements, the two midside nodes on each edge are adjusted so that the

edges of adjacent elements are C1 continuous. The adjustment is done in the Pat3Nas translator. After

the Pat3Nas translator is executed, the location of the two midside nodes in the Patran database has

changed. The user is informed with a warning message. The user can turn the adjustment of midside

nodes ON and OFF with the environment variable PEDGE_MOVE. By default, the midside nodes are

adjusted to make the adjacent elements C1 continuous. For PEDGE_MOVE set to OFF, the points on a

cubic edge are not adjusted.

Patran generates the input for MD Nastran. For cubic edges, FEEDGE Bulk Data entries with POINTs

are written. By default, the location of the two POINTs is moved to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge in MD

Nastran. The points generated by Patran must not be moved. Therefore, a parameter entry PARAM,

PEDGEP, 1 is written by Patran. PEDGEP=1 indicates that incoming POINTs are not moved in MD

Chapter 2: Building A Model 19

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference

Nastran. The default is PEDGEP= 0, MD Nastran will move the two POINTs to 1/3 and 2/3 of the edge.

The C1 continuous cubic edges improve the accuracy of p-element results.

In the Version 69 Release Guide, a cylinder under internal pressure was tested to determine the quality

of shell p-elements for curved geometry. The accuracy of the results was very good when exact geometry

was used. With C1 continuous edges we recover the same quality of results within single precision

accuracy.

Both element and p-formulation properties are defined using the Element Properties application by

choosing Action: Create, Dimension: 1D/2D/ or 3D, Type: Beam/Shell/Bending Panel/2D

Solid/Membrane/ or Solid, and p-Formulation on the main form. The details of the property form for this

case are described on (p. 199). Most of the properties are optional and have defaults; the material property

name is required.

Two properties that may need to be defined are Starting P-orders and Maximum P-orders. These

properties specify the polynomial orders for the element interpolation functions in the three spatial

directions. Although these are integer values, in Patran, each property is defined using the Patran vector

definition. At first, this may seem peculiar, but it gives the user access to many useful tools in the Patran

system for defining and manipulating these properties. Typically, a user would define these properties

with a syntax like <3 4 2> to prescribe polynomial orders of 3, 4, and 2 in the X, Y, and Z directions.

Patran will convert these values to floating point <3. 4. 2.>, but the Patran MD Nastran Preference will

interpret them. This vector syntax is convenient primarily because it allows these properties to be defined

using the Fields application. In a case where the material properties are constant over the model, but it is

desirable to prescribe a distribution of p-orders, vector fields can be defined and specified in a single

property definition. The Patran MD Nastran Preference will provide additional help for this modeling

function. At the end of an adaptive analysis, when results are imported, vector, spatial fields will

optionally be created containing the p-orders used for each element for each adaptive cycle. To repeat a

single adaptive cycle, it is necessary only to modify the element properties by selecting the appropriate

field.

A common use of the Maximum P-orders property is in dealing with elements in the vicinity of stress

singularities. These singularities may be caused by the modeling of the geometry (e.g., sharp corners),

boundary conditions (e.g., point constraints), or applied forces (e.g., point forces). Sometimes it is easier

to tell the adaptive analysis to “ignore” these singular regions than it is to change the model. This can be

done by setting the Maximum P-orders property for elements in this region to low values (e.g., <1 1 1>

or <2 2 2>. These elements are sometimes called “sacrificial” elements.

It is well known in solid mechanics that point forces and constraints cause the stress field in the body to

become infinite. In p-adaptive analyses, care must be taken in finite element creation and loads

application to ensure that these artificial high-stress regions don’t dominate the analysis.

Generally, the best results are obtained with distributed loads (pressures) or distributed displacements.

There are two options under Loads/BCs for applying distributed displacements. The Element Uniform

and Element Variable types under Displacements allow displacement constraints to be applied to the

20 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference

faces of solid elements. If the elements are p-elements, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are

produced. If applied to non-p-elements, the appropriate SPC1 or SPCD entries are produced.

Several new loads and boundary conditions support the p-shell and p-beam elements. Distributed loads

can be applied to beam elements or to the edge of shell elements. Pressure loads can be applied to the

faces of p-shell elements. Temperature loads can be applied to either the nodes or the elements.

Analysis Definition

Adaptive linear static and normal modes analyses are supported in Version 68 of MSC .Nastran; both

solution types are supported by the Patran MD Nastran Preference. Only a few parameters on the

Analysis forms may need to be changed for p-element analyses. If running a version of MSC . Nastran

prior to Version 68.2 (i.e., Version 68, or 68.1), the OUTPUT2 Request option on the Translation

Parameters form must be set to Alter File in order to process the results in Patran. The Solution

Parameters forms for the linear static and normal modes analyses contain a Max p-Adaptive Cycles

option, which is defaulted to 3. The Subcase Parameters form under Subcase Create has options to limit

the participation of this subcase in the adaptive error analysis. Finally, the Advanced Output Requests

form under Subcase Create has an option to define whether results are to be produced for all adaptive

cycles or only every nth adaptive cycle.

Two different approaches are provided for postprocessing results from MD Nastran p-element analyses.

Both approaches rely on MD Nastran creating results for a “VU mesh” where each p-element is

automatically subdivided into a number of smaller elements. In the standard approach with the default

MD Nastran VU mesh (3 x 3 x 3 elements) for solids, (3 x 3 elements) for shells and (3 elements) for

beams, the results will automatically be mapped onto the Patran nodes and elements during import. This

mapping will occur for all 10, Patran solid element topologies mentioned above. The most accurate

mapping and postprocessing takes place when results are mapped to the higher-order Patran elements.

When the adaptive analysis process increases the p-orders in one or more elements beyond 3, the 3 x 3 x

3 VU mesh, mapping, and postprocessing may not be sufficiently accurate. The Patran MD Nastran

Preference provides a second approach to handle this situation. In this case, a user can specify a higher-

order VU mesh (e.g. 5 x 5 x 5) on the MD Nastran OUTRCV entry and then import both model data and

results entities into a new, empty Patran database. In this case, the VU mesh and results are imported

directly, rather than mapped and can be post-processed with greater accuracy. The OUTRCV entry is

currently supported only with the Bulk Data Include File option on the Translation Parameters form.

It should be noted that, with this import mode, displays of element results (e.g., fringe plots) may be

discontinuous across parent, p-element boundaries. This occurs because the VU grids generated by MD

Nastran are different in each p-element. Along element boundaries there are coincident nodes and a result

associated with each one. The user should not try to perform an Equivalence operation to remove these

coincident nodes. If this is done, subsequent postprocessing operations will likely be incorrect.

For both postprocessing options, a result case is created for each adaptive cycle in the analysis. The result

types in this result case will depend on specific options selected on the Output Request form. By default,

the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option is equal to zero. This means that output quantities specific to

Chapter 2: Building A Model 21

Adaptive (p-Element) Analysis with the Patran MD Nastran Preference

p-elements will be written only for the last cycle. If postprocessing of results from intermediate cycles is

desired, the Adaptive Cycle Output Interval option should be set equal to one.

One of the key uses of output from intermediate adaptive cycles is in examining the convergence of

selected quantities (e.g., stresses). This can be done using the X-Y plotting capability under the Results

application.

Potential Pitfalls

There are several areas where a user can encounter problems producing correct p-element models for MD

Nastran. One is the incorrect usage of the midside nodes in the Patran higher order-elements. These nodes

are used in p-element analysis only for defining the element geometry; analysis degrees of freedom are

not associated with these nodes. Therefore it is illegal, for example, to attach non p-elements to assign

loads or boundary conditions to these nodes. One way this can occur inadvertently is if a nodal force is

applied to the face of a Patran solid. This force is interpreted as a point force at every node (including the

midside nodes) on the face of the solid. For the p-elements, this is not valid. This type of load should

instead be applied as an element uniform or element variable pressure.

Modifying an existing solid model for adaptive, p-element analysis is relatively straightforward. The first

step is to read the NASTRAN input file into Patran using the Analysis/Read Input File option. The model

may contain any combination of linear or quadratic tetra, penta, or hexa elements. The second step is to

use the Element Props/Modify function to change the Option for all solid properties from Standard

Formulation to P-Formulation. The element properties form for p-formulation solids has many options

specific to p-element analysis; but they all have appropriate defaults. This property modification step is

the only change that must be made before submitting the model for analysis.

Often, however, as discussed in Potential Pitfalls, 21, it is appropriate to modify the types of loads and

boundary conditions applied to the model. For example, in non p-element models, displacement

constraints are applied using MD Nastran SPC entries at grid points. In p-element analyses, element-

oriented displacement constraints are more appropriate. Existing displacement LBCs can be modified

using the Loads/BCs/Modify/Displacement option. For an SPC type of displacement constraint, the LBC

type is nodal. For a p-element analysis, Element Uniform or Element Variable displacement constraints

are more appropriate. The application region must be changed from a selection of nodes to a selection of

element faces. As described above, nodal forces can be troublesome in p-element analyses. If possible,

it is beneficial to redefine point forces as pressures acting on an element face. If this is not possible, an

alternative is to limit the p-orders in the elements connected to the node with the point force; this can be

done by defining a new element property for these elements and defining the Maximum P-orders vector

appropriately. Element pressures, inertial loads, and nodal temperatures defined in the original model

need not be changed for the p-element analysis.

22 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Coordinate Frames

Coordinate frames will generate a unique CORD2R, CORD2C, or CORD2S Bulk Data entry, depending

on the specified coordinate frame type. The CID field is defined by the Coord ID assigned in Patran. The

RID field may or may not be defined, depending on the coordinate frame construction method used in

Patran. The A1, A2, A3, B1, B2, B3, C1, C2, and C3 fields are derived from the coordinate frame

definition in Patran.

Only Coordinate Frames that are referenced by nodes, element properties, or loads and boundary

conditions can be translated. For more information on creating coordinate frames see Creating

Coordinate Frames (p. 393) in the Geometry Modeling - Reference Manual Part 2.

To output all the coordinate frames defined in the model whether referenced or not, set the environment

variable “WRITE_ALL_COORDS” to ON.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 23

Finite Elements

The Finite Elements Application in Patran allows the definition of basic finite element construction.

Created under Finite Elements are the nodes, element topology, multi-point constraints, and

Superelement.

For more information on how to create finite element meshes, see Mesh Seed and Mesh Forms (p. 25)

in the Reference Manual - Part III.

Nodes

Nodes in Patran will generate unique GRID Bulk Data entries in MD Nastran. Nodes can be created

either directly using the Node object, or indirectly using the Mesh object. Each node has associated

Reference (CP) and Analysis (CD) coordinate frames. The ID is taken directly from the assigned node

24 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

ID. The X1, X2, and X3 fields are defined in the specified CP coordinate frame. If no reference frame is

assigned, the global system is used. The PS and SEID fields on the GRID entry are left blank.

the GRID) is the

coordinate system in which

the displacements,

degrees of freedom,

constraints, and solution

vector are defined.

The coordinate system in

which the node location is

defined (CP of the GRID)

can be either the reference

coordinate frame, the

analysis coordinate frame,

or a global reference

(blank), depending on the

value of the forward

translation parameter

“Node Coordinates.”

Elements

The Finite Elements Application in Patran assigns element connectivity, such as Quad4, for standard

finite elements. The type of MD Nastran element to be created is not determined until the element

properties are assigned (for example, shell or 2D solid). See the Element Properties Form, 78 for details

concerning the MD Nastran element types. Elements can be created either directly using the Element

object, or indirectly using the Mesh object

Chapter 2: Building A Model 25

Finite Elements

.

26 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

2D, or 3D element mesh.

be created.

the elements created by meshing. For

example, the shape for a 2D element can

be either triangular or quadralateral.

mesh is to be created; for example,

IsoMesh, Paver. The type of geometry (for

example, simple (green) or complex

(magenta) surface) may determine the

choice of the mesher.

meshed. For example Surface 1, 2, 3, or

Surface 1:3.

The value of Global Edge Length specifies

the approximate size of the elements

created when meshing.

to select an existing element property (for

example, 2D Shell) that will be assigned to

the elements created by meshing.

The button Create New Property is used to

create an element property that will be

assigned to the elements that will be

created by meshing. During creating the

element property no application region can

be specified; it is specified automatically

using all the elements created by meshing.

This “ghosted” area will become dark when an element property is selected.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 27

Finite Elements

Multi-point Constraints

Multi-point constraints (MPCs) can also be created from the Finite Elements Application. These are

special element types that define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The forms for

creating MPCs are found by selecting MPC as the Object on the Finite Elements form. The full

functionality of the MPC forms are defined in Create Action (FEM Entities).

the MPC when it is created.

28 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

MPC Types

To create an MPC, first select the type of MPC to be created from the option menu. The MPC types that

appear in the option menu are dependent on the current settings of the Analysis Code and Analysis Type

preferences. The following table describes the MPC types which are supported for MD Nastran.

Explicit Structural Creates an explicit MPC between a dependent degree of freedom

and one or more independent degrees of freedom. The dependent

term consists of a node ID and a degree of freedom, while an

independent term consists of a coefficient, a node ID, and a degree

of freedom. An unlimited number of independent terms can be

specified, while only one dependent term can be specified. The

constant term is not allowed in MD Nastran.

RSSCON Structural Creates an RSSCON type MPC between a dependent node on a

Surf-Vol linear 2D plate element and two independent nodes on a linear 3D

solid element to connect the plate element to the solid element. One

dependent and two independent terms can be specified. Each term

consists of a single node.

Rigid (Fixed) Structural and Creates a rigid MPC between one independent node and one or

Explicit more dependent nodes in which all six structural degrees of

Nonlinear freedom are rigidly attached to each other. An unlimited number of

dependent terms can be specified, while only one independent term

can be specified. Each term consists of a single node. There is no

constant term for this MPC type.

RBAR Structural and Creates an RBAR element, which defines a rigid bar between two

Explicit nodes. Up to two dependent and two independent terms can be

Nonlinear specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of degrees of

freedom. The nodes specified in the two dependent terms must be

the same as the nodes specified in the two independent terms. Any

combination of the degrees of freedom of the two nodes can be

specified as independent as long as the total number of independent

degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is no constant term for this

MPC type.

RBE1 Structural Creates an RBE1 element, which defines a rigid body connected to

an arbitrary number of nodes. An arbitrary number of dependent

terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of

degrees of freedom. Any number of independent terms can be

specified as long as the total number of degrees of freedom

specified in all of the independent terms adds up to six. Since at

least one degree of freedom must be specified for each term there

is no way the user can create more that six independent terms.

There is no constant term for this MPC type.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 29

Finite Elements

RBE2 Structuraland Creates an RBE2 element, which defines a rigid body between an

Explicit arbitrary number of nodes. Although the user can only specify one

Nonlinear dependent term, an arbitrary number of nodes can be associated to

this term. The user is also prompted to associate a list of degrees of

freedom to this term. A single independent term can be specified,

which consists of a single node. There is no constant term for this

MPC type.

RBE3 Structuraland Creates an RBE3 element, which defines the motion of a reference

Explicit node as the weighted average of the motions of a set of nodes. An

Nonlinear arbitrary number of dependent terms can be specified, each term

consisting of a node and a list of degrees of freedom. The first

dependent term is used to define the reference node. The other

dependent terms define additional node/degrees of freedom, which

are added to the m-set. An arbitrary number of independent terms

can also be specified. Each independent term consists of a constant

coefficient (weighting factor), a node, and a list of degrees of

freedom. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

RROD Structural Creates an RROD element, which defines a pinned rod between

two nodes that is rigid in extension. One dependent term is

specified, which consists of a node and a single translational degree

of freedom. One independent term is specified, which consists of a

single node. There is no constant term for this MPC type.

RSPLINE Structural Creates an RSPLINE element, which interpolates the

displacements of a set of independent nodes to define the

displacements at a set of dependent nodes using elastic beam

equations. An arbitrary number of dependent terms can be

specified. Each dependent term consists of a node, a list of degrees

of freedom, and a sequence number. An arbitrary number of

independent nodes (minimum of two) can be specified. Each

independent term consists of a node and a sequence number. The

sequence number is used to order the dependent and independent

terms with respect to each other. The only restriction is that the first

and the last terms in the sequence must be independent terms. A

constant term, called D/L Ratio, must also be specified.

30 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

RTRPLT Structural Creates an RTRPLT element, which defines a rigid triangular plate

between three nodes. Up to three dependent and three independent

terms can be specified. Each term consists of a node and a list of

degrees of freedom. The nodes specified in the three dependent

terms must be the same as the nodes specified in the three

independent terms. Any combination of the degrees of freedom of

the three nodes can be specified as independent as long as the total

number of independent degrees of freedom adds up to six. There is

no constant term for this MPC type.

Cyclic Structural Describes cyclic symmetry boundary conditions for a segment of

Symmetry the model. If a cyclic symmetry solution sequence is chosen, such

as “SOL 114,” then CYJOIN, CYAX and CYSYM entries are

created. If a solution sequence that is not explicitly cyclic

symmetric is chosen, such as “SOL 101,” MPC and SPC entries are

created. Be careful, for this option automatically alters the analysis

coordinate references of the nodes involved. This could

erroneously change the meaning of previously applied load and

boundary conditions, as well as element properties.

Sliding Structural Describes the boundary conditions of sliding surfaces, such as pipe

Surface sleeves. These boundary conditions are written to the NASTRAN

input file as explicit MPCs. Be careful, for this option

automatically redefines the analysis coordinate references of all

affected nodes. This could erroneously alter the meaning of

previously applied load and boundary conditions, as well as

element properties.

RBAR1 Structural This is an alternate (simplified) form for RBAR. Creates an

RBAR1 element, which defines a rigid bar between two nodes,

with six degrees of freedom at each end. Each dependent term

consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the

independent term consists only of a node (with all six degrees of

freedom implied). The constant term is the thermal expansion

coefficient, ALPHA.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 31

Finite Elements

RTRPLT1 Structural Alternative format to define a rigid triangular plate element

connecting three grid points. Creates an RTRPLT1 element, which

defines a rigid triangular plate between three nodes. Each

dependent term consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom,

while the independent term consists only of the node (with all six

degrees of freedom implied). The constant term is the thermal

expansion coefficient, ALPHA.

RJOINT Structural Creates an RJOINT element, which defines a rigid joint element

connecting two coinciding grid points. Each dependent term

consists of a node and a list of degrees of freedom, while the

independent term consists only of a node (with all six degrees of

freedom implied). There is no constant term for this MPC type.

Degrees of Freedom

Whenever a list of degrees of freedom is expected for an MPC term, a listbox containing the valid degrees

of freedom is displayed on the form.

The following degrees of freedom are supported by the Patran MD Nastran MPCs for the various analysis

types:

UX Structural

UY Structural

UZ Structural

RX Structural

RY Structural

RZ Structural

Note: Care must be taken to make sure that a degree of freedom that is selected for

an MPC actually exists at the nodes. For example, a node that is attached only

to solid structural elements will not have any rotational degrees of freedom.

However, Patran will allow you to select rotational degrees of freedom at this

node when defining an MPC.

Explicit MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and Explicit is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran MPC Bulk Data entry.

The difference in explicit MPC equations between Patran and MD Nastran will result in the A1 field of

the MD Nastran entry being set to -1.0.

32 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

information. This term will

define the fields for G1 and

C1 on the MPC entry. Only

one node and DOF

combination may be defined

for any given explicit MPC.

The A1 field on the MPC entry

is automatically set to -1.0.

term information. These

terms define the Gi, Ci,

and Ai fields on the MPC

entry, where i is greater

than one. As many

coefficient, node, and

DOF combinations as

desired may be defined.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 33

Finite Elements

Rigid (Fixed)

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and Rigid (Fixed) is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data

entry. The CM field on the RBE2 entry will always be 123456.

term information. This

term defines the GMi

fields on the RBE2

entry. As many nodes

as desired may be

selected as dependent

terms.

term information. This

term defines the GN

field on the RBE2

entry. Only one node

may be selected.

34 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

RBAR MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RBAR is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBAR Bulk Data entry

and defines a rigid bar with six degrees of freedom at each end. Both the Dependent Terms and the

Independent Terms lists can have either 1 or 2 node references. The total number of referenced nodes,

Chapter 2: Building A Model 35

Finite Elements

however, must be 2. If either or both of these lists references 2 nodes, then there must be an overlap in

the list of referenced nodes.

term information.

Either one or two

nodes may be

defined as having

dependent terms.

The Nodes define the

GA and GB fields on

the RBAR entry. The

DOFs define the

CMA and CMB fields.

Holds the

independent term

information. Either

one or two nodes

may be defined as

having independent

terms.The Nodes

define the GA and

GB fields on the

RBAR entry.The

DOFs define the CNA

and CNB fields.

36 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

RBE1 MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RBE1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBE1 Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 37

Finite Elements

term information.

Defines the GMi and

CMi fields on the RBE1

entry. An unlimited

number of nodes and

DOFs may be defined

here.

Holds the

independent term

information. Defines

the GNi and CNi

fields on the RBE1

entry. The total

number of Node/DOF

pairs defined must

equal 6, and be

capable of

representing any

general rigid body

motion.

38 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

RBE2 MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RBE2 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBE2 Bulk Data entry.

term information. This

term defines the GMi

and CM fields on the

RBE2 entry. As many

nodes as desired may

be selected as

dependent terms.

term information. This

term defines the GN field

on the RBE2 entry. Only

one node may be

selected.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 39

Finite Elements

RBE3 MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RBE3 is the selected type. This form is used to create a MD Nastran RBE3 Bulk Data entry.

term information.

Defines the GMi and CMi

fields on the RBE3 entry.

The first dependent term

will be treated as the

reference node,

REFGRID and REFC.

The rest of the

dependent terms

become the GMi and

CMi components.

term information.

Defines the Gi, j, Ci,

and WTi fields on the

RBE3 entry.

40 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

RROD MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RROD is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RROD Bulk Data entry.

term information.

Defines the GB and

CMB on the RROD

entry. Only one

translational DOF may

be referenced for this

entry.

term information.

Defines the GA field on

the RROD entry. The

CMA field is left blank.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 41

Finite Elements

RSPLINE MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RSPLINE is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RSPLINE Bulk Data

entry. The D/L field for this entry is defined on the main MPC form. This MPC type is typically used to

tie together two dissimilar meshes.

Holds the

dependent term

information.

term information. Terms

with the highest and

lowest sequence numbers

must be independent.

Determines

what sequence

the independent

and dependent

terms will be

written to the

RSPLINE entry.

42 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

RTRPLT MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RTRPLT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RTRPLT Bulk Data

entry.

term information.

Defines the GA, GB,

GC, CMA, CMB, and

CMC fields of the

RTRPLT entry.

term information. The

total number of nodes

referenced in both the

dependent terms and

the independent terms

must equal three.

There must be exactly

six independent

degrees of freedom,

and they must be

capable of describing

rigid body motion.

Defines the GA, GB,

GC, CNA, CNB, and

CNC fields of the

RTRPLT entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 43

Finite Elements

The Cyclic Symmetry MPC created by this form will be translated into CYJOIN, CYAX, and CYSYM

entries if cyclic symmetric is the selected type, see Solution Parameters, 267, or into SPC and MPC

entries if the requested type is not explicitly cyclic symmetric.

Symmetry, the type of

symmetry will always be

rotational.

NOTE: MPC option will

automatically overwrite the

analysis coordinate

references on all the nodes

belonging to the Dependent

and Independent Regions.

Be careful that this does not

erroneously change the

meaning of previously

applied loads and boundary

conditions, or element

properties.

will be automatically written to

the CYAX entry.

entries.

44 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

The Sliding Surface MPC created by this form will be translated into explicit MPCs in the NASTRAN

input file.

note that this MPC option will

automatically overwrite the analysis

coordinate references on all the

nodes belonging to the Dependent

and Independent Regions. Be

careful that this does not

erroneously change the meaning of

previously applied loads and

boundary conditions, or element

properties.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 45

Finite Elements

RBAR1 MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RBAR1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RBAR1 Bulk Data

entry..

46 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

RTRPLT1 MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RTRPLT1 is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RTRPLT1 Bulk Data

entry..

Chapter 2: Building A Model 47

Finite Elements

RJOINT MPCs

This subordinate MPC form appears when the Define Terms button is selected on the Finite Elements

form and RJOINT is the selected type. This form is used to create an MD Nastran RJOINT Bulk Data

entry..

48 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Finite Elements

Superelements

In superelement analysis, the model is partitioned into separate collections of elements. These smaller

pieces of structure, called Superelement, are first solved as separate structures by reducing their stiffness

matrix, mass matrix, damping matrix, loads and constraints to the boundary nodes and then combined to

solve for the whole structure. The first step in creating a superelement is to create a Patran group (using

Group/Create) that contains the elements in the superelement. This group is then selected in the Finite

Elements application on the Create/ Superelement form.

List of existing

superelements.

elements that define a

superelement. Note that the group

must contain elements not just

nodes. If a group does not contain

elements, it will not show up in the

Element Definition Group listbox.

form that allows a user to select

boundary nodes of the

superelement. By default, the

common nodes between the

elements in the group and the rest of

the model are selected as the

boundary nodes.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 49

Finite Elements

boundary nodes.

Selected Boundary Nodes box.

Boundary Nodes box.

50 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

The Materials form appears when the Material toggle, located on the Patran application selections, is

chosen. The selections made on the Materials menu will determine which material form appears, and

ultimately, which Nastran material will be created.

The following pages give an introduction to the Materials form and details of all the material property

definitions supported by the Nastran Preference.

Only material records that are referenced by an element property region or by a laminate lay-up are

translated. References to externally defined materials result in special comments in the input Nastran file,

e.g., materials that property values that are not defined in Patran.

The forward translator performs material type conversions when needed. This applies to both constant

material properties and temperature-dependent material properties. For example, a three-dimensional

orthotropic material that is referenced by CHEXA elements is converted into a three-dimensional

anisotropic material.

This form appears when Materials is selected on the main menu. The Materials form is used to provide

options to create the various Nastran materials.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 51

Material Library

directionality and can be set to

Isotropic, 2D Orthotropic, 3D

Orthotropic, 2D Anisotropic, 3D

Anisotropic, or Composite. For

Explicit Nonlinear additional materials

can be defined.

specified directionality.

material ID will be assigned during

translation.

created.

define the material properties. See

Material Input Properties Form, 52.

portions of the material model. By default, all

portions of a created material model are active.

52 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

The Input Properties form is the form where all constitutive material models are defined for each material

created. Multiple constitutive models can be created for each material created by pressing the Apply

button on the main Materials form with the proper widgets set on this form. Multiple constitutive models

of the same type are not allowed. The list of existing constitutive models are shown in the bottom list

box. A list of valid constitutive models is given in the table below.

Set the Constitutive Model

here. Press the Apply

button on the main

Materials application form

to create a constitutive

model for the given

material. Multiple

constitutive models can be

created for the same

material.

the databoxes. If a value

can be temperature, model,

strain rate, or strain

dependent, a separate

listbox will appear to select

a field. These fields must be

created in the Fields

application as Material type

fields.

constitutive models. Use the

Change Material Status

button to turn them on/off

from translation into the

Nastran input deck.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 53

Material Library

The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action.

Isotropic • Linear Elastic

• Nonlinear Elastic

• Hyperela • Nearly • Test Data • Mooney Order:

stic Incompressible Rivlin

1

3

• Coefficients • Mooney Order:

Rivlin

1

• Ogden

• Foam 2

• Arruda-Boyce

3

• Gent

4

5

• Elastoplastic • Stress/Strain • von Mises • Isotropic

Curve • Tresca • Kinematic

• Mohr- • Combined

Coulomb

• Drucker-

Prager

54 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

• Parabolic • Isotropic • Piecewis

Mohr- • Kinematic e

Colomb Linear

• Combined

• Buyukoztu • Cowper-

rk Symon

Concrete ds

• Oak

Ridge

National

Labs

• 2-1/4 Cr-

Mo

ORNL

• Reversed

Plasticit

y ORNL

• Fully

Alpha

Reset

ORNL

• Generalize

d

Plasticit

y

• None • Power Law

• Power Rate Law

• Johnson-Cook

• Kumar

• Hardening • von • Isotropic

Slope Mises • Kinematic

• Tresca • Combined

• Mohr-

Coulom

b

• Drucker-

Prager

Chapter 2: Building A Model 55

Material Library

• Perfectly • Parabolic • None • Piecewis

Plastic Mohr- e

Colomb Linear

• Buyukoztu • Cowper-

rk Symon

Concrete ds

• Oak

Ridge

National

Labs

• 2-1/4 Cr-

Mo

ORNL

• Reversed

Plasticit

y ORNL

• Fully

Alpha

Reset

ORNL

• Generalize

d

Plasticit

y

• Rigid • None • Power Law

Plastic • Power Rate Law

• Johnson-Cook

• Kumar

Piecewise- Piecewise

Linear Linear

Cowper-

Symonds

• Failure • n/a

• Hill

• Hoffman

• Tsai-Wu

• Maximum Strain

56 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

• Failure1/ • Maximum • No Progressive

2/3 Stress • Standard

• Maximum • Gradual Selective

Strain

• Immediate Selective

• Hoffman

• Hill

• Tsai-Wu

• Hashin

• Puck

• Hashin-

Tape

• Hashin-

Fabric

• User

Defined

Failure

• Creep • Tabular Input

• Creep Law 111

• Creep Law 112

• Creep Law 121

• Creep Law 122

• Creep Law 211

• Creep Law 212

• Creep Law 221

• Creep Law 222

• Creep Law 300

• MATVP

• Viscoelas • No Function

tic • Williams-Landel-Ferry

• Power Series Expansion

2D • Linear Elastic

Orthotro

pic

Chapter 2: Building A Model 57

Material Library

• Failure • Stress • n/a

• Strain • Hill

• Hoffman

• Tsai-Wu

• Maximum Strain

• Failure1/ • See Isotropic Entry

2/3

• Elastopla • Stress/Strain • von • Isotropic • Piecewis

stic Curve Mises • Kinematic e

• Tresca Linear

• Combined

• Mohr- • Cowper-

Coulom Symon

b ds

• Drucker-

Prager

• Oak

Ridge

National

Labs

• 2-1/4 Cr-

Mo

ORNL

• Reversed

Plasticit

y ORNL

• Fully

Alpha

Reset

ORNL

• Generalize

d

Plasticit

y

58 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

• Hardening • von • Isotropic

Slope Mises • Kinematic

• Tresca • Combined

• Mohr-

Coulom

b

• Drucker-

Prager

• Perfectly • von • None • Piecewis

Plastic Mises e

• Oak Linear

Ridge • Cowper-

National Symon

Labs ds

• 2-1/4 Cr-

Mo

ORNL

• Reversed

Plasticit

y ORNL

• Fully

Alpha

Reset

ORNL

• Generalize

d

Plasticit

y

• Creep • MATVP

• Viscoelas • See Isotropic Entry

tic

3D • Linear Elastic

Orthotro

pic

• Elastopla • See 2D Orthotropic Entry

stic

• Failure1/ • See 2D Orthotropic Entry

2/3

• Creep • See 2D Orthotropic Entry

Chapter 2: Building A Model 59

Material Library

• Viscoelas • See Isotropic Entry

tic

2D • Linear Elastic

Anisotro

pic

• Elastopla • See 2D Orthotropic Entry

stic

• Failure • See Isotropic Entry

• Failure1/ • See Isotropic Entry - progressive failure not supported

2/3

3D • Linear Elastic

Anisotro

pic

• Elastopla • See 2D Orthotropic Entry

stic

• Failure1/ • See 2D Orthotropic Entry - progressive failure not supported

2/3

• Creep • See Isotropic Entry

Fluid • Linear Elastic

Composi • Laminate

te • Rule of Mixtures

• HAL Cont. Fiber

• HAL Disc. Fiber

• HAL Cont. Ribbon

• HAL Disc. Ribbon

• HAL Particulate

• Short Fiber 1D

• Short Fiber 2D

60 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

Additional materials for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700) are listed in the following table.

Isotropic • Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic • Solid

(MAT1) • Fluid

• Elastoplastic • Plastic • Bilinear

Kinematic(MAT

3)

• Iso.Elastic

Plastic(MAT12)

• Rate Dependent

(MAT19)

• Piecewise Linear • Biliear • Cowper Symonds

(MAT24) • Linearized • General

• Table

• Rate Sensitive • Powerlaw

(MAT64)

• Resultant (MAT28)

• Shape Memory (MAT30)

• With Failure (MAT13)

• Power Law (MAT18)

• Ramberg-Osgood (MAT80)

• Hydro (MAT10) • Linearized

• Viscoelastic • Viscoelastic (MAT6)

• Rigid • Material Type 20 • No Constraints

• Global Directions

• Local Directions

• MATRIG (Rigid • Geometry • No Constraints

Body Properties) • Defined • Global Directions

• Local Directions

• Johnson Cook • Material Type 15 • No • Minimum Pressure

iteractions • No Tension, Min. Stress

• Accurate • No Tension, Min.

Pressure

Chapter 2: Building A Model 61

Material Library

• Rubber • Frazer Nash • Coefficient • Respect

(MAT31) • Least Square • Ignore

Fit

• Blatz-Ko (MAT7)

• General Viscoelastic (MAT76)

• Cellular Rubber (MAT87)

• Mooney Rivlin • Coeff.

(MAT27) • Least Square

• Arruda-Boyce

(MAT127)

• Hyperelastic • Coefficients

(MAT77) • Least Square Fit 1/2/3

• Simplified • Tension- • True Strain • Simple

Compresion • Engineering Average

Load Strain Rate • 12 Point

• Compression Average

Load

• Tension-

Compressio

n Identical

• Foam • Soil and Foam • Active • Allow Crushing

(MAT5/14) (MAT14) • Reversible

• Inactive

(MAT 5)

• Low Density • Bulk • No Tension

Urethane Viscosity • Maintain Tension

(MAT57) Inactive

• Fu Chang Foam • Bulk

(MAT83) Viscosity

Active

• Low Density • Bulk • No • With

Urethane Viscosity Tension Relaxati

(MAT57) Inactive • Maintain on curve

• Bulk Tension • No

Viscosity Relaxati

Active on Curve

62 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

• Viscous Foam (MAT62)

• Crushable (MAT63)

• Elastoviscoplatic • With Damage • Strain • Bilinear • Cowper

(MAT81) Damage • Linearized Symond

• Orthotropic s

• Table

• RCDC • General

• Nonlinear Plastic Discrete Beam (MAT68)

• Side Impact Dummy (SID) Damper Discrete Beam (MAT69)

• Hydraulic Gas Damper Discrete Beam (MAT70)

• Cabel Discrete Beam (MAT71)

• Elastic Spring Discrete Beam (MAT74)

• Elastic 6 DOF Spring Discrete Beam (MAT93)

• Inelastic Spring Discrete Beam (MAT94)

• Inelastic 6 DOF Srping Discrete Beam (MAT95)

• General Joint Discrete Beam (MAT97)

• Spring Damper • Nonlinear 6 • Follow Loading Curve

DOF Discrete • Follow Unloading Curve

Beam (MAT119)

• Follow Unloading Stiffness

• General

Nonlinear 1 • Follow Quadratic Unloading

DOF Discrete

Beam (MAT121)

• Elastic Spring (MATDS01)

• Viscous Damper (MATDS02)

• Elastic Spring (MATDS03)

• Nonlinear Elastic Spring (MATDS04)

• Nonlinear Viscous Damper (MATDS05)

• General Nonlinear Spring (MATDS06)

• Spring Maxwell (MATDS07)

• Inelastic Spring (MATDS08)

• Tri-linear Degrading (MATDS13)

• Squat Shear Wall (MATDS14)

• Muscle (MATDS15)

Chapter 2: Building A Model 63

Material Library

• Seat Belt • Seat Belt (MATB01)

• Spotweld • MATDSW1 • DF

• MATDSW2 • DFRES

• DFRESNF

• DFRESNFP

• MATDSW3 • DFSTR

• MATDSW4 • DFRATE

• MATDSW5 • DFNS

• DFSIF

• DFSTRUC

2D • Glass • Laminated Glass • Glass

Orthotro (Laminated) (MAT32) • Polymer

pic

• Composite • Enh. Composite • Tsai-Wu Theory

Damage • Chang-Chang Theory

• Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic (MAT2)

• Composites • Composites and • Zero • 0.0

and Fabrics Fabrics • One • 1.0

(MAT58)

• Two • -1.0

• Three

3D • Honeycomb • Composite • Bulk Viscosity Inactive

Orthotro Honeycomb • Bulk Viscosity Active

pic (MAT26)

• Composite • Composite Damage (MAT22)

• Composite • Faceted

Failure (MAT59) • Ellipsoidal

• Modified • Modified • Bulk • LCA .LT. • Zero

Honeycomb Honeycomb Viscosity 0 • One

(MAT126) Inactive • LCA .GT. • Two

• Bulk 0

Viscosity

Active

64 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

2D • Viscoplastic • Viscoplastic • Shell • From Curve

Anisotro (MAT103) • Manual Entry

pic

• Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic (MAT2)

3D • Viscoplastic • Viscoplastic • Brick • From Curve

Anisotro (MAT103) • Manual Entry

pic

• Linear Elastic • Linear Elastic (MAT2)

Linear Elastic

The Input Properties form displays the following for linear elastic properties. The translator produces

MAT1 entries for isotropic materials, MAT8 entries for 2D orthotropic materials, MAT3 entries using

axisymmetric solid elements or MAT9 entries using 3D solid elements (CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA)

for 3D orthotropic materials, MAT2 entries for 2D plane stress - 2D anisotropic materials, and MAT9

entries for 3D anisotropic materials. For temperature dependencies, the corresponding MATTi entries are

written referencing TABLEMi entries. Temperature dependency is defined using material fields defined

under the Fields application. SOL 600 jobs using 3D Orthotropic material the MATORT entry is written.

Isotropic Description

Elastic Modulus Elastic modulus, E, (Young’s modulus). Can be temperature

dependent.

Poisson Ratio Poisson’s ratio (NU). Can be temperature dependent. Should be

between -1.0 and 0.5.

Shear Modulus Shear modulus (G). Can be temperature dependent.

Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent.

Thermal Expansion Coefficient Thermal coefficient of expansion (A). Can be temperature

dependent.

Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature

dependent.

Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF).

Elastic Modulus ii Modulus of elasticity in 1-, 2-, and 3-directions. Can be

temperature dependent.

Poisson Ratio ij Poisson’s ratio for uniaxial loading in the three different

directions. Can be temperature dependent.

Shear Modulus ij In-plane and transverse shear moduli in ij planes. Can be

temperature dependent.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 65

Material Library

Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent.

Thermal Expansion Coefficient ii Thermal coefficients of expansion in the three directions. Can be

temperature dependent.

Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature

dependent.

Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF).

Stiffness ij Elements of the 6x6 symmetric material property matrix in the

material coordinate system. Can be temperature dependent.

Density Density (RHO). Can be temperature dependent.

Thermal Expansion Coefficient ij Thermal coefficients of expansion. Can be temperature

dependent.

Structural Damping Coefficient Structural damping coefficient (GE). Can be temperature

dependent.

Reference Temperature Reference temperature (TREF).

Nonlinear Elastic

The Input Properties form displays the following for nonlinear elastic properties. Use this form to define

the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve on the MATS1 entry. A stress-strain table defined using the Fields

application can be selected on this form. Based on this information the translator will produce MATS1 of

type NLELAST and TABLES1 entries. This is used primarily for SOL 106 and 129. This option is not

supported by SOL 600. Use an elastoplastic constitutive model instead.

Isotropic Description

Stress/Strain Curve Defines the nonlinear elastic stress-strain curve. You must select

a field from the listbox. It can be strain and/or temperature

dependent. Tabular definition of the stress-strain curve via the

Fields application using a material field of strain should follow

the specifications as outlined by Nastran. The first point of the

material field should be the origin and the second point must be at

the initial yield point. This material curve is elastic, meaning that

in both loading and unloading the material behavior follows the

stress-strain curve as defined. It is not recommended that both

nonlinear elastic and elastoplastic constitutive models be active or

defined for the same material. For work hardening, use the

Elastoplastic constitutive model. See the Nastran Quick

Reference Guide for more details.

66 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

Hyperelastic

The Input Properties form displays the following for hyperelastic properties. Use this form to define the

data describing hyperelastic behavior of a material. This data is placed on MATHP and TABLES1 entries

or on the MATHE entry for SOL 600.

If you select Test Data as the Data Type, the Input Options form reverts to the form used for non-SOL

600 solutions and data is placed on a MATHP entry (Mooney-Rivlin strain energy model). To use test

data for MATHE/SOL 600 runs, use the Experimental Data Fitting features under the Tools menu to

determine the coefficients and enter them manually.

Tension/Compression TAB1 All data provided must reference a strain dependent

Equibiaxial Tension TAB2 field defining the test data. Please refer to the

Nastran Quick Reference Guide for descriptions of

Simple Shear Data TAB3 each of these tabular inputs.

Pure Shear Data TAB4

Pure Volume Compression TABD

If Coefficients is selected as the Data Type, use the form to describe the strain energy potential. The

Mooney Rivlin model can be written out as a MATHP or MATHE entry for SOL 600. Make sure you use

the one that is consistent with the solution to be run. Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyce, and Gent models are

used for SOL 600 MATHE entries only.

Distortional Deformation Coefficients, Aij Material constants related to distortional

deformation. The Order of the Polynomical

determines the number of coefficients required as

input.

Volumetric Deformation Coefficients, Di Material constants related to volumetric

deformation. The Order of the Polynomial

determines the number of coefficients required as

input.

Density RHO Defines the mass density which is an optional

property.

Volumetric Thermal Expansion Coefficient AV Coefficient of volumetric thermal expansion.

Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal

expansion coefficient.

Structural Damping Coefficient GE Structural damping element coefficient.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 67

Material Library

Strain Energy Function Strain energy densities as a function of the strain

C10, C01, C11, C20, C30 invariants in the material. May vary with

temperature via a defined material field. This

option consolidates several of the hyperelastic

material models, including Neo-Hookean (C10

only), Mooney-Rivlin (C10 & C01), and Full Third

Order Invariant (all coefficients).

Density RHO Defines the mass density

Thermal Expansion Coefficient Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal

expansion. This property is optional. May vary with

temperature via a defined material field.

Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.

Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal

expansion coefficient.

Structural Damping Coefficient GE Structural damping element coefficient.

Ogden Description

Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.

Density RHO Defines the material mass density.

Coefficient of Thermal Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal

Expansion expansion. This property is optional. May vary with

temperature via a defined material field

Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal

expansion coefficient.

Modulus k k in the Ogden equation. The number of

moduli required as input is dependent on the Order

of the Polynomial.

Exponent k k in the Ogden equation. The number of

exponents required as input is dependent on the

Order of the Polynomial.

Foam Description

Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.

Density RHO Defines the material mass density.

68 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

Foam Description

Thermal Expansion Coefficient Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal

expansion. This property is optional. May vary with

temperature via a defined material field

Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal

expansion coefficient.

Modulus n un in the Foam equation. The number of moduli

required as input is dependent on the Order of the

Polynomial.

Deviatoric Exponent n n in the Foam equation. The number of

exponents required as input is dependent on the Order

of the Polynomial.

Volumetric Exponent n n in the Foam equation. The number of

exponents required as input is dependent on the Order

of the Polynomial.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 69

Material Library

NKT Chain density times Boltzmann constant times

temperature. May vary with temperature via a

defined material field.

Chain Length Average chemical chain cross length. May vary with

temperature via a defined material field.

Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.

Density RHO This defines the material mass density.

Thermal Expansion Coefficient Defines the instantaneous coefficient of thermal

expansion. This property is optional. May vary with

temperature via a defined material field

Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal

expansion coefficient.

Gent Description

Tensile Modulus Defines standard tension modulus (E). May vary with

temperature via a defined material field.

I1 = I1 – 3 . May vary with

temperature via a defined material field.

Bulk Modulus K Defines the Bulk Modulus.

Density RHO This defines the material mass density.

Coefficient of Thermal Defines the coefficient of thermal expansion.

Expansion

Reference Temperature TREF Defines the reference temperature for the thermal

expansion coefficient.

Elastoplastic

The Input Properties form displays the following for elastoplastic properties. Use this form to define the

data describing plastic behavior of a material. The stress-strain curve data is input via a material property

field of strain and placed on MATS1 and TABLES1 entries. The data input should be the true equivalent

stress vs. equivalent total strain. Other options are placed on the MATEP entry and are valid only for SOL

70 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

400 & 600. Note that the existence of both an elastoplastic and nonlinear elastic constitutive models in

the same material is not recommended.

Yield Function Yield function (YF) criterion:

Prager supported on MATS1 entry. All others are for

SOL 600 and placed on the MATEP entry. SOL 400

only supports von Mises.

Hardening Rule Hardening Rule (HR). These are Isotropic,

Kinematic, and Combined isotropic and kinematic

and are placed on the MATS1 entry or MATEP entry

depending on solution sequence and yield function

selected. Hardening rules Power Law, Rate Power

Law, Johnson-Cook, Kumar are available when no

Yield Function is specified. This is used for SOL

600 only on MATEP entry.

Strain Rate Method Selects an option for strain-rate dependent yield

stress used in SOL 600. Cowper-Symonds requires

input of Denominator C and Inverse Exponent P.

Stress/Strain Curve This data must reference a strain dependent field. It

can also be temperature and strain rate dependent.

LIMIT1 in MATS1 determined from supplied

tabular field of stress-strain curve. Data is placed on

TABLES1 entry.

Internal Friction Angle Defined for Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager

yield function placed on the MATS entry LIMIT2.

Yield Point Initial yield stress.

Stress at Yield

Beta Parameter beta for parabolic Mohr-Coulomb or

Buyukozturk concrete models. Placed on the

MATEP entry.

10th Cycle Yield Stress Equivalent 10th cycle tensile yield stress for Oak

Ridge National Labs models (ORNL). Placed on the

MATEP entry.

Denominator C Constants for the Cowper-Symonds strain rate

method.

Inverse Exponent P

Chapter 2: Building A Model 71

Material Library

Coefficient A / B / C / Bi Coefficient and exponent data for Power Law, Rate

Power Law, Johnson-Cook, and Kumar hardening

Exponent M / N rules.

initial Strain Rate Additional data input for the Johnson-Cook

hardening rule.

Room Temperature

Melt Temperature

Yield Function Yield function (YF) criterion:

Prager supported on MATS1 entry.

Hardening Rule Hardening Rule (HR). These are Isotropic,

Kinematic, and Combined isotropic and kinematic

and are placed on the MATS1 entry.

Strain Rate Method No strain rate methods are available for the

Hardening Slope data.

Hardening Slope Work hardening slope (H) - slope of stress versus

plastic strain. Defined in units of stress. For an

elastic-perfectly plastic case, use the Perfectly

Plastic data input option.

Internal Friction Angle Defined for Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager

yield function placed on the MATS entry LIMIT2.

Yield Point Initial yield stress.

Yield Function See the Stress / Strain Curve table above. All

options are identical except there must be a yield

function selected.

Hardening Rule None are available since no hardening is possible

for a perfectly plastic material.

Strain Rate Method Piecewise linear or Cowper-Symonds are

available.

72 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

Yield Point Initial yield stress.

All other data input is described in the Stress/Strain Curve table above.

Yield Function No yield functions are available as the material is

defined as rigid and then plastic, so no yield is

possible.

Hardening Rule See the Stress / Strain Curve table above. Valid

options are the Power Law, Power Rate Law,

Johnson-Cook, Kumar, and Piecewise Linear.

Strain Rate Method Piecewise linear or Cowper-Symonds are available

only if the Piecewise Linear hardening rule is

selected.

Stress/Strain Curve Necessary only when not using one of the power

law hardening rules (Piecewise-Linear). This data

must reference a strain dependent field. It can also

be temperature and strain rate dependent. LIMIT1

in MATS1 determined from supplied tabular field of

stress-strain curve. Data is placed on TABLES1

entry.

All other data input is described in the Stress/Strain Curve table above. Rigid Plastic is only used in

SOL 600 and only for isotropic materials.

See the Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information about the necessary data for MATS1 and

MATEP entries.

Failure

The Input Properties form displays the following for failure material models. Note that this failure model

is for non-SOL 400/600/700 solutions. See Failure 1/2/3 for SOL 400/600/700.

Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear

Compression Stress Limit used to compute margins of safety in certain

elements. They have no effect on the computational

Shear Stress Limit procedures.

Failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional orthotropic and anisotropic materials appear in

the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries and the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields on the MAT8

entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 73

Material Library

Failure Limits For 2D orthotropic on the MAT8 entry, the limits

can be defined as stress or strain allowables. This is

not applicable to isotropic and anisotropic

materials.

Tension Stress Limit Stress limits for tension, compression, and shear are

Compression Stress Limit the same as those defined for non-composite failure.

Bonding Shear Stress Limit Allowable shear stress of the bonding material. SB

field on the PCOMP entry.

Failure criteria for the isotropic and two-dimensional orthotropic and anisotropic materials appear in

the ST, SC, and SS fields on MAT1 and MAT2 entries and the Xt, Xc, Yt, Yc, and S fields on the MAT8

entry unless composites are being used in which case the data is written to the PCOMP entry as

necessary.

The Input Properties form displays the following for failure material models used in SOL 400 and 600.

Solution sequences other than SOL 400/600/700 should use the Failure constitutive model above instead.

Up to three failure constitutive models can be defined for any one material. Failure 1 must exist in order

for Failure 2 and 3 to be recognized and translated into the proper MATF and MATTF entries.

Temperature dependent properties as defined by material fields are translated onto the MATTF entry.

Note also that only Failure 1 allows for definition of progressive failure. Failure models 2 and 3 take on

whatever progressive failure is defined in Failure 1. Different failure criterion may exist between all three

in the same material definition.

The table below outlines the allowable properties. All values are real, 0.0, or left blank with no defaults

unless otherwise indicated. Which properties are available is dependent on the Failure Criterion selected.

The following Failure Criteria are available:

• Maximum Stress

• Maximum Strain

• Hill

• Hoffman

• Tsai-Wu

• Hashin

• Puck

• Hashin-Tape

74 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

• Hashin-Fabric

Property Description

Progressive Failure Options Progressive failure options are None, standard

Progressive Failure, Gradual or Immediate selective

progressive failure for SOL 600. SOL 400 does not

support progressive failure models and will ignore

this setting if set to anything other than None. Only

failure indices are computed when no progressive

failure is specified. Anisotropic materials do not

support progressive failure.

Tension Stress Limit X / Y /Z Tension, compression, and shear stress or strain

Tension Strain Limit X / Y / Z limits used in the Maximum Stress or Strain, Hill,

Hoffman, and Tsai-Wu failure criteria.

Compression Stress Limit X / Y / Z

Compression Strain Limit X / Y / Z

Shear Strain Limit XY / YZ / ZX

Shear Stress Bond (SB) Allowable shear stress of bonding material between

layers for composites only. This is used in SOL 600

only and is ignored for SOL 400.

Failure Index Failure index used for Hill, Hoffman, and Tsai-Wu

criteria.

Interactive Strength XY / YZ / ZX Interactive strength constants for specified plane

used in the Tsai-Wu criterion.

Max Fiber / Matrix Tension Definable stress limits for Hashin, Puck, Hashin-

Max Fiber / Matrix Compression Tape, and Hashin-Fiber criteria.

Max Tape Fiber Compression

Max 2nd Cross Fiber Tension / Compression

Max Thickness Compression

Layer Shear Strength Shear stress limits for Hashing, Puck, Hashin-Tape,

Transverse Shear Strength YZ / ZX and Hashin-Fiber criteria.

Slope P12C / P12T / P23C / P23T of Fracture Slopes of the failure envelope used in Puck failure

Envelope criterion.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 75

Material Library

Property Description

Deactivate Tension X / Y/ Z If any value other than blank or 0.0 is entered for

Deactivate Compress X / Y / Z progressive failure options Gradual and Immediate,

Deactivate Shear XY / YZ / ZX failed elements are deactivated (placed ICi fields in

MATF entry). See the Nastran Quick Reference

Deactivate Elements Guide for information.

Deactivate Fiber /Matrix Compression

Deactivate Matrix Tension

Deactivate Matrix Compression

Residual Stiffness Factor Reduction fractions or factors. Values can be

Matrix Compression Factor between 0.0 and 1.0. Used only for Gradual or

Shear Stiffness Factor Immediate progressive failure modes (placed on Ai

E33 Fiber Failure Factor fields in MATF entry). See the Nastran Quick

Shear Fiber Failure Factor Reference Guide for more information.

Creep

The Input Properties form displays the following for creep models.

Data defined by the use of this form to define the primary stiffness, primary damping, and secondary

damping for a creep model with tabular input appears on the CREEP entry for non-SOL 600 runs. Only

isotropic materials use this data input method.

Use this form to define the coefficients for one of many empirical creep models available appears on

the CREEP entry for non-SOL 600 runs. Only isotropic materials use this creep definition.

MATPV Description

Use this form to define either the coefficients and exponents for creep model or provide tabular field

data to define Temperature vs. Creep Strain, Creep Strain Rate vs. Stress, Strain Rate vs. Creep Strain,

or Time vs. Creep Strain in SOL 600 runs. This data is written to the MATVP entry. If tabular data is

provided, this data is written to TABLEM1 entries. It is not recommended to mix the exponents and

coefficients and tabular data. Use one or the other.

76 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Material Library

Viscoelastic

The Input Properties form displays the following for viscoelastic models. This material model is only

used in SOL 600 runs and all data is placed on the MATVE, MATTVE entries. Linear elastic or

hyperelastic constitutive models for isotropic or anisotropic materials must exist in addition to the

viscoelastic model.

Composite

The Composite forms provide alternate ways of defining the linear elastic properties of materials. All the

composite options, except for Laminated Composite, will always result in a homogeneous elastic

material in MD Nastran.

When the Laminated Composite option is used to create a material and this material is then referenced in

a “Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region, a PCOMP entry is created. However,

if this material is referenced by a different type of element property region, for example, “Revised or

Standard Homogeneous Plate,” then the equivalent homogeneous material properties are used instead of

the laminate lay-up data. Only materials created through the Laminated Composite option should be

referenced by a “Revised or Standard Laminate Plate” element property region. Refer to Composite

Materials Construction (p. 112) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Laminated

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Materials form,

Composite is the selected Object, and Laminate is the selected Method. Use this form to define the

laminate lay-up data for a composite material. If the resulting material is referenced in a “Revised or

Standard Laminate Plate” element property region, then an MD Nastran PCOMP entry containing the

lay-up data is written. If the resulting material is referenced by any other type of element property region,

the equivalent homogeneous properties of the material are used

The difference between the "Total" option and the "Total - %thicknesses" option is that the former

requires that the user give actual thickness values of each ply and the latter requires each ply thickness

to be given as a percentage of the total layup thickness. This is the prefered method when applying the

composite material to solid (CHEXA) elements or 2D solid element (axisymmetric, plane strain).

Chapter 2: Building A Model 77

Material Library

.

78 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

The Element Properties form appears when the Element Properties toggle, located on the Patran main

form, is chosen.There are several option menus available when creating element properties. The

selections made on the Element Properties menu will determine which element property form appears,

and ultimately, which MD Nastran element will be created.

The following pages give an introduction to the Element Properties form, and details of all the element

property definitions supported by the Patran MD Nastran Preference.

This form appears when Element Properties is selected on the main menu. There are four option menus

on this form. Each will determine which MD Nastran element type will be created and which property

forms will appear. The individual property forms are documented later in this section. For a full

description of this form, see Element Properties Forms (p. 63) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 79

Element Properties

element’s dimension. The options are:

0D (point elements)

1D (bar elements)

2D (tri and quad elements)

3D (tet, wedge, and hex elements)

selection made in the Dimension option

menu. Use this menu to define the

general type of element, such as:

Mass versus Grounded Spring

Shell versus 2D_Solid

element property; for example change

the shell thickness.

present, and their contents depend

heavily on the selections made in

Dimension and Type. See Table 2-1 for

more help.

properties; for example shell thickness,

or material orientation.

This is used to specify the region

(area) of geometry or elements that

are to be included in the property

definition.

80 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

The following table outlines the option menus when Analysis Type is set to Structural.

Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2

0D • Mass • Coupled

• Grounded

• Lumped

• Grounded Spring

• Grounded Damper

• Grounded Bush

1D • Beam • General Section • Standard

• P-Formulation

• Curved w/General

Section

• Curved w/Pipe

Section

• Lumped Section

• Tapered Section • Standard

• P-element

• General Section •

(CBEAM)

• Rod • General Section • Standard

• CONROD

• Pipe Section

• Spring

• Damper • Scalar

• Viscous

• Gap • Adaptive

• Non-Adaptive

• 1D Mass

• PLOTEL

• Bush

• Spot Weld Connector

• Fastener Connector

Chapter 2: Building A Model 81

Element Properties

Dimension Type Option 1 Option 2

2D • Shell • Homogeneous • Standard

• Revised

• P-element

• Laminate • Standard

• Revised

• Equivalent Section • Standard

• Revised

• P-element

• Field Point Mesh (exterior acoustic element)

• Bending Panel • Standard

• • Revised

• P-element

• Revised

• P-Formulation

• Hyperelastic Formulation

• Axisymmetric • Standard

• Hyperelastic Formulation

• PLPLANE

• Infinite (exterior acoustic element)

• Membrane • Standard

• Revised

•

• P-Formulation

• • Shear Panel

• P-Formulation

• Hyperelastic Formulation

• Laminate

• Gasket

82 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 0D Mass Coupled Point/1

Use this form to create a CONM1 element. This defines a 6 x 6 symmetric mass matrix at a geometric

point of the structural model.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 83

Element Properties

Defines the

orientation of

the 1-2-3 axes

of the mass

matrix. The

value is a

reference to

an existing

coordinate

frame. The 1-

2-3 axes will

be aligned with

the X-Y-Z axes

of the

specified

coordinate

system. If a

non

rectangular

coordinate

system is

specified, the

system will be

evaluated into

a local

rectangular

system, which

is then used to

orient the

mass matrix.

This property

is the CID field

on the CONM1

entry. This

property is

optional.

Defines the values of the mass matrix. These properties are the Mij fields on the CONM1 entry

and can either be real values or references to existing field definitions. Each of these properties

are optional; however, at least one must be defined.

84 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM1 element that were not shown on the

previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.

Mass Component 3,3 Defines the values of the mass matrix. These are the Mij fields on the

CONM1 entry. These properties can either be real values or references to

Mass Component 4,1 existing field definitions. Each of these properties are optional; however, at

Mass Component 4,2 least one must be defined.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 0D Mass Grounded Point/1

Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of

the structural model. Only one node is used in this method, and the other node is defined to be grounded.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 85

Element Properties

inertia value to be applied. This is the M field Defines which degree of freedom this value

on the PMASS entry. This property can be will be attached to. This property can be set to

either a real value or a reference to an UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines the

existing field definition. This property is setting for the C1 field on the CMASS1 entry.

required. This property is required.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 0D Mass Lumped Point/1

Use this form to create a CONM2 element. This defines a concentrated mass at a geometric point of the

structural model.

86 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines an offset from the specified node to Defines the translational mass value to be

where the lumped mass actually is to exist in used. This is the M field on the CONM2

the structural mode. This vector is defined in entry. This property can either be a real

the Mass Orientation coordinate system. value or a reference to an existing field

Defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields on the definition. This property is required.

CONM2 entry. This property is optional.

mass matrix. This is a reference to an existing

coordinate frame. The 1-2-3 axes will be

aligned with the X-Y-Z axes of the specified

coordinate system. If a nonrectangular

coordinate system is specified, the system will

Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of be evaluated into a local rectangular system,

this lumped mass. These properties are the Iij which is then used to orient the mass matrix.

fields on the CONM2 record. These values can This is the CID field on the CONM2 entry. If the

be either real values or references to existing Value Type is set to Vector then the

field definitions. These values are optional. components of the vector define the center of

gravity of the mass in the basic coordinate

system and the field for CID is translated as -1.

This property is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CONM2 element that were not shown on the

previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these properties.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 87

Element Properties

Inertia 3,1 Inertia i,j defines the rotation inertia properties of this lumped

mass. These are the Iij fields on the CONM2 entry. These values

Inertia 3,2 can be either real values or references to existing field definitions.

Inertia 3,3 These values are optional.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form when the following options are chosen.

Create 0D Grounded Spring Point/1

88 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CELAS1 or CELAS1D (for SOL 700) element and a PELAS property. This

defines a scalar spring element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other

node is defined to be grounded.

Defines the coefficient to be used for this spring. This is the K field on the PELAS entry.

This can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property

is required.

system, used only for Explicit Nonlinear

(SOL 700). This property is optional. Defines what damping

is to be included. This

is the GE field on the

PELAS entry. This

Defines the relationship between the spring property can either be

deflection and the stresses within the a real value or a

spring. This property is the S field on the reference to an

PELAS entry and can either be a real value, existing field

or a reference to an existing field definition. definition. This

This property is optional. property is optional.

Defines which degree of freedom this value is to be attached to. This can be set to UX, UY, UZ,

RX, RY, or RZ. This property defines the setting of the C1 field on the CELAS1 entry. This

property is required.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 89

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form when the following options are chosen.

Create 0D Grounded Damper Point/1

Use this form to create a CDAMP1 or CDAMP1D (for SOL 700) element and a PDAMP property. This

defines a scalar damper element of the structural model. Only one node is used in this method. The other

node is defined to be grounded.

used. This property is the B field on the Defines which degree of freedom this value is

PDAMP entry and can either be a real value to be attached to. This property can be set to

or a reference to an existing field definition. UX, UY, UZ, RY, or RZ and defines the setting

This property is optional. for the C1 field on the CDAMP1 entry. This

property is required.

used only for Explicit Nonlinear (SOL 700). This

property is optional.

90 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Bush

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element

Properties form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Bush Bar/2

Chapter 2: Building A Model 91

Element Properties

or CID..

92 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view

these properties.

Bush Orientation System CID specifies the Grounded Bush Orientation System. The

element X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system

principal axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical

coordinate system, the grid point specified locates the system. If

CID = 0, the basic coordinate system is used.

Spring Constant 1 Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of

Spring Constant 2 freedom. This property is defined in terms of force per unit

Spring Constant 3 displacement and can be either a real value or a reference to an

Spring Constant 4

Spring Constant 5 existing field definition for defining stiffness vs. frequency.

Spring Constant 6

Stiff. Freq Depend 1

Stiff. Freq Depend 2

Stiff. Freq Depend 3

Stiff. Freq Depend 4

Stiff. Freq Depend 5

Stiff. Freq Depend 6

Stiff. Force/Disp 1 Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree

Stiff. Force/Disp 2 of freedom of the spring-damper system.

Stiff. Force/Disp 3

Stiff. Force/Disp 4

Stiff. Force/Disp 5

Stiff. Force/Disp 6

Damping Coefficient 1 Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of

Damping Coefficient 2 freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference

Damping Coefficient 3 to an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency

Damping Coefficient 4

Damping Coefficient 5

Damping Coefficient 6

Damp. Freq Depend 1

Damp. Freq Depend 2

Damp. Freq Depend 3

Damp. Freq Depend 4

Damp. Freq Depend 5

Damp. Freq Depend 6

Structural Damping Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient

Struc. Damp Freq Depend (GE1). This property can be either a real value, or a reference to

an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency.

Stress Recovery Translation Stress recovery coefficients. The element stress are computed by

Stress Recovery Rotation multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element

forces.

Strain Recovery Translation Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed

Strain Recovery Rotation by multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element

strains.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 93

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Beam General Section Bar/2

94 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CBAR element and a PBAR or PBARL property. A CBARAO entry will be

generated if any Station Distances are specified. This defines a simple beam element in the structural

model.

Note: CBAR entries will include all user input pin flags.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 95

Element Properties

Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library

• Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions

(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If

Dimensions is choosen, the MD Nastran’s built-in section library

(Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, (for the standard Beam

Library) or PBRSECT/PBMSECT (for an Arbitrary section) will be

used to define the bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard

bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the

beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the

Translation Parameters Version must be set to version 69 or later.

Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in

the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the

list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property defines the

value to be used in the MID field on the PBAR entry. This property

is required.

Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any

cross-sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY

plane, where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation defines

the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This

property is required.

• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran

global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0

1 0 Coord 5>).

• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the bar

orientation vector will be written to the CBAR entry:

OFFT value on the CBAR entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be

written.

Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how

the input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the

CBAR entry.

96 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam

cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These

Offset @ Node 2 properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A,

W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBAR entry.

• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

System controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran.

• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the offset

vectors will be written to the CBAR entry and how the vector input

will be interpreted in Patran:

position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. Within Patran, the

vector will be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some

other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>).

If Element is specified, an E will be written to the second or third

position of the OFFT value on the CBAR entry. Within Patran, the

vector will be interpreted to be in the Element coordinate system.

Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 These degrees of freedom are in the element local coordinate

system. Values that can be specified are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ,

Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 or any combination. These properties are used to remove

connections between the node and selected degrees of freedom at

the two ends of the beam. This option is commonly used to create a

pin connection by specifying RX, RY, and RZ to be released.

Defines the setting of the PA and PB fields on the CBAR record.

These properties are optional.

Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on

the PBAR entry. This value can be either real values or a reference

to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section.

These are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBAR entry. These values

Inertia 2,2 can be either real values or references to existing field definitions.

Inertia 2,1 These values are optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 97

Element Properties

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the

PBAR entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to

an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on

the PBAR entry. These values can be either real value or references

Shear Stiff, Z to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of

the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the

beam. This is the NSM field on the PBAR entry. This value can be

either a real value or reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Y of Point C Indicates the stress recovery. They define the Y and Z coordinates of

the stress recovery points across the section of the beam, as defined

Z of Point C in the local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1,

Y of Point D D2, E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBAR entry. These values can

be either real values or references to existing field definitions. These

Z of Point D properties are optional.

Y of Point E

Z of Point E

Y of Point F

Z of Point F

[Contact Beam Radius] This allows the equivalent radius for beam-to-beam contact to be

different for each beam cross section. The MD Nastran entry

BCBMRAD is written to the .bdf file. The BCBMRAD entry format

is different for SOL 400 and SOL 600.

[Station Distances] Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are

fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range

of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry.

The SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The

alternate format for the CBARAO entry is not supported. These

values are real values. These properties are optional.

Create Sections, I C L ..., Activates the Beam Library forms. These forms will allow the user

Beam Library to define beam properties by choosing a standard cross section type

and inputing dimensions.

98 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Beam General Section Bar/2, Bar/3

P-Formulation Bar/4

Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This form defines a

simple beam element in the structural model for an adaptive, p-element analysis.

Note: .Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this

property set and will not export user defined pin unless the user includes an

asterisk (*) in the string, in which case Patran will export the defined pin flags

for all elements in the property set.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 99

Element Properties

Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-sectional properties. This orientation will

define the local XY plane, where the x-axis is along the beam, and this orientation vector, which can be defined as

either a vector or a reference to an existing node, is in the XY plane. This defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or

G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is required.

previously created using

the beam library to be

Input Properties selected. When a beam

section is chosen and the

Associate Beam Section

option is toggled, the cross

sectional properties need

not be input on this Input

Properties form.

Defines the material to be

used. A list of all materials

currently in the database is

displayed when data is

entered. Either select from

the list using the mouse, or

type in the name. This

property defines the value

to be used in the MID field

on the PBAR entry. This

property is required.

Allows a user to define a

bar/beam section either by

Dimensions

(PBARL/PBEAML) or by

Properties (PBAR/PBEAM).

If Dimensions is choosen,

the MD Nastran’s built-in

section library (Version 69

and later),

PBARL/PBEAML, will be

used to define the

bar/beam. If Properties is

chosen, the standard

bar/beam properties,

PBAR/PBEAM will be used

to define the beam section.

If the Dimensions Option is

set to Dimensions, the

Translation Parameters

Version must be set to

version 69 or later.

forms will allow the user to define beam Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam

properties by choosing a standard cross cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These

section type and inputting dimensions. properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A,

W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On the

CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement coordinate a

system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are

optional.

100 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML

property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form

to view these properties.

Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on

the PBEAM entry. This value can be either real values or a reference

to an existing field definition. This property is required.

Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These

are the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be

Inertia 2,2 either real values or references to existing field definitions. These

Inertia 2,1 values are optional.

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the

PBEAM entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to

an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on

the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references

Shear Stiff, Z to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the

element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam.

This is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value can be either a

real value or reference to an existing field definition. This property is

optional.

Y of Point C Indicates the stress recovery. Define the Y and Z coordinates of the

stress recovery points across the section of the beam as defined in the

Z of Point C local element coordinate system. These are the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2,

X of Point D F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real

values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are

Y of Point D optional.

X of Point E

Y of Point E

X of Point F

Y of Point F

Station Distances Defines up to 6 points along each bar element. Values specified are

fractions of the beam length. Therefore, these values are in the range

of 0. to 1. This defines the X1 and X6 fields on the CBARAO entry. The

SCALE field on the CBARAO entry is always set to FR. The alternate

format for the CBARAO records is not supported. These values are

real values. These properties are optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 101

Element Properties

Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.

Maximum P-orders Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined

by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-

orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process

will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-

orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.

P-order Coord. System The two sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this

coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID

field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error

analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle

to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.

Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.

By default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT

entry.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Beam Curved w/General Section Bar/2

Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This form defines a curved beam

element of the structural model. The CBEND element has several ways to define the radius of the bend

and the orientation of that curvature.This element in Patran always uses the method of defining the center

of curvature point (GEOM=1). An alternate property of the Curved Pipe element also exists.

102 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

specifying a vector from the first node of the element or by referencing a

node. The CBEND element in MD Nastran has several ways to define the Defines the cross-sec

radius of the pipe bend and the orientation of that curvature. This defines This property is the A

the settings of the X1, X2, X3, and G0 fields of the CBEND entry. This This value can be eith

property is required. to an existing field def

optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 103

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were

not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these

properties.

Inertia 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These

properties are the I1 and I2 fields on the PBEND entry. These values

Inertia 2,2 can either be real values or references to existing field definitions.

These values are optional.

Torsional Constant Defines the torsional stiffness of the beam. This is the J field on the

PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value, or a reference to

an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Shear Stiff, R Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2

fields on the PBEND entry. These values can be either real values or

Shear Stiff, Z references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the

element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit length of

the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This value can be

either real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Radial NA Offset Defines the radial offset of the geometric centroid from the end nodes.

Positive values move the centroid of the section towards the center of

curvature of the pipe bend. This property is the DELTAN field on the

PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an

existing field definition. This property is optional.

R of Point C These properties are for stress recovery. They define the R and Z

coordinates of the stress recovery points across the section of the beam,

Z of Point C as defined in the local element coordinate system. These properties are

R of Point D the C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2 fields on the PBEND entry.

These values can be either real values or references to existing field

Z of Point D definitions. These properties are optional.

R of Point E

Z of Point E

R of Point F

Z of Point F

104 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Beam Curved W/Pipe Section Bar/2

Use this form to create a CBEND element and a PBEND property. This defines a curved pipe

or elbow element of the structural model. The internal pressure is defined as part of the element definition

because, for pipe elbows, the internal pressure affects the element stiffness.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 105

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when Defines the

data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. Defines the MID center of

field on the PBEND entry. This property is required. curvature of the

pipe bend. This

can be done

either by

specifying a

vector from the

first node of the

element or by

referencing a

node. The

CBEND

element in MD

Nastran has

several ways to

define the

radius of the

pipe bend and

the orientation

of that

curvature.

Defines the

settings of the

X1, X2, X3, and

G0 fields on the

CBEND entry.

This element in

Patran always

uses the

method of

defining the

center of

curvature point

Indicates the

wall thickness

of the pipe.

This is the t

field on the

PBEND entry.

This value

can be either

a real value or

a reference to

an existing

field

definition.

This property

is required.

Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the pipe

cross section. These are the RC and ZC fields on the PBEND entry. Indicates the distance from the centroid of

These values can either be real values or references to existing field cross section to mid-wall location. This is t

definitions. These properties are optional. on the PBEND entry. This value can either

value or a reference to an existing field de

This property is required.

106 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CBEND element and a PBEND property that were

not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these

properties.

Internal Pipe Pressure Indicates the static pressure inside the pipe elbow. This is the P

field on the PBEND entry. This value can be either a real value or

a reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material

of the element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit

length of the beam and is the NSM field on the PBEND entry. This

value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field

definition. This property is optional.

Stress Intensification Indicates the desired type of stress intensification to be used. This

is a character string value. This property is the FSI field on the

PBEND entry. Valid settings of this parameter are General,

ASME, and Welding Council.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Beam Lumped Section Bar/2

Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBCOMP property. This defines a beam

element of constant cross section, using a lumped area element formulation.The orientation vector can

be defined as either a vector or a reference to an existing node in the XY plane.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 107

Element Properties

Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this

property set and will not export user defined pin unless the user includes an

asterisk (*) in the string, in which case Patran will export the defined pin flags

for all elements in the property set.

108 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library

• Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions

(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If

Dimensions is choosen, the MD Nastran’s built-in section library

(Version 69 and later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the

bar/beam. If Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties,

PBAR/PBEAM will be used to define the beam section. If the

Dimensions Option is set to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters

Version must be set to version 69 or later.

Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the

database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list

using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the

MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.

Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-

sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane,

where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation defines the value

for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the CBAR entry. This property is

required.

• Value Type The orientation vector can be defined as either a vector or a reference

to an existing node in the XY plane.

• Reference Coordinates Analysis - Analysis Coordinate System.

Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the actual centroids of the beam

cross section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These

Offset @ Node 2 properties, after any necessary transformations, become the W1A,

W2A, W3A, W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry. On

the CBEAM entry, these values are always in the displacement

coordinate system of the node. In Patran, they are either global, or in a

system specified such as <0 1 0 Coord 5>. These properties are

optional.

• Value Type Specifies that the offset is defined in terms of a vector.

• Reference Coordinates Analysis - Analysis Coordinate System.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 109

Element Properties

Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By

default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams.

Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 By releasing specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type

connections can be created. These degrees-of-freedom are in the

element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified here

are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties

define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry and

are optional.

Warp DOF @ Node 1 Defines a node ID where the warping degree-of-freedom constraints

and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within

Warp DOF @ Node 2 the model. They are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These

properties are optional.

Area Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This is the A field on

the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference

to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the

element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam.

This is the NSM field on the PBCOMP record. This value can be either

a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property

is optional.

Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These are the K1 and K2 fields on

the PBCOMP entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference

Shear Stiff, Z to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Y of NSM Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location

of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam

Z of NSM cross-section coordinate system. These properties are the M1 and M2

fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values can be either real values or

references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Symmetry Option Specifies which type of symmetry is being used to define the lumped

areas of the beam cross section. This is a character string parameter.

The valid settings are No Symmetry, YZ Symmetry, Y Symmetry, Z

Symmetry, or Y=Z Symmetry. This defines the setting of the

SECTION field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is optional.

110 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Ys of Lumped Areas Defines the locations of the various lumped areas. These are defined in

the cross-sectional coordinate system. These properties define the Yi

Zs of Lumped Areas and Zi fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real

values. These properties are optional.

Area Factors Defines the Fraction of the total area to be included in this lumped

area. The sum of all area factors for a given section must equal 1.0. If

the data provided does not meet this requirement, the values will all be

scaled to the corrected value. These properties define the values for the

Ci fields on the PBCOMP entry. These values are lists of real values.

These properties are optional.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Beam Tapered Bar/2

Chapter 2: Building A Model 111

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CBEAM element and a PBEAM or PBEAML property. This defines a

beam element with varying cross sections.

112 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this

property set and will not export user defined pin unless the user includes an

asterisk (*) in the string, in which case Patran will export the defined pin flags

for all elements in the property set.

Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library

• Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions

(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions

is choosen, the MSC.Nastran’s built-in section library (Version 69 and

later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If

Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM

will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set

to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to

version 69 or later.

Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the

database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list

using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the

MID field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.

Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-

sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane,

where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation, after any

necessary transformations, defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0

fields on the CBEAM entry. This property is required.

• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran

global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0

Coord 5>).

Chapter 2: Building A Model 113

Element Properties

• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the bar

orientation vector will be written to the CBEAM entry:

OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be

written.

Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how

the input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the

CBEAM entry.

Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the shear centers of the beam cross

section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties,

Offset @ Node 2 after any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A,

W1B, W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry.

• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran.

• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the offset

vectors will be written to the CBEAM entry and how the vector input

will be interpreted in Patran:

position of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the

vector will be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some other

Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>). If

Element is specified, an E will be written to the second or third position

of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will

be interpreted to be in the Element coordinate system.

114 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By

default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams.

Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 By releasing specified degrees of freedom, pin or sliding type

connections can be created. These degrees-of-freedom are in the

element local coordinate system. The values that can be specified here

are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, RZ, or a combination. These properties

define the settings of the PA and PB fields on the CBEAM entry and

are optional.

Warp DOF @ Node 1 Defines a node ID where the warping degree of freedom constraints

and results will be placed. These must reference existing nodes within

Warp DOF @ Node 2 the model. These are the SA and SB fields on the CBEAM entry. These

properties are optional.

Station Distances Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties

will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam

length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values

define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. These

values are real values. These properties are optional.

Cross-Sect. Areas Defines the cross-sectional area of the element. This property defines

the settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be

either a real value, or reference to an existing field definition. This

property is required.

Inertias 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These

defines the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM entry.

Inertias 2,2 These values are real values. These properties are optional.

Inertias 1,2

Torsional Constants Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J

fields on the PBEAM entry. This is a list of real values, one for each

station location. This property is optional.

Ys of C Points Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the

shear center for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2,

Zs of C Points E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These are lists of real

Ys of D points values, one for each station location. These properties are optional.

Zs of D Points

Ys of E Points

Zs of E Points

Ys of F Points

Zs of F Points

Chapter 2: Building A Model 115

Element Properties

Nonstructural Masses Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of

the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the

beam. This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This is a list

of real values, one for each station location. This property is optional.

NSM Inertia @ Node 1 Specified the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length

about the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the

NSM Inertia @ Node 2 element. These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the

PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or references to

existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Y of NSM @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location

of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the beam

Z of NSM @ Node 1 cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A), M1(B),

Y of NSM @ Node 2 and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real

values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are

Z of NSM @ Node 2 optional.

Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2

fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or

Shear Stiff, Z references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Shear Relief Y Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and

S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values

Shear Relief Z or references to existing field definitions. These properties are

optional.

Warp Coeff. @ Node 1 Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These

properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These

Warp Coeff. @ Node 2 values can be either real values or references to existing field

definitions. These properties are optional.

Y of NA @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the centroid of the cross section to the location

of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam cross section

Z of NA @ Node 1 coordinate system and are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and N2(B) fields

Y of NA @ Node 2 on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or

references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Z of NA @ Node 2

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Beam General Section (CBEAM)

116 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This set of options provides a method of creating beam models with warping due to torsion. The

capabilities of this beam properties formulation option are similar to those of the “Tapered Section”

formulation, except that warping due to torsion is handled more conveniently.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 117

Element Properties

Note: Patran will check the element associativity to other elements sharing this

property set and will not export user defined pin flags for nodes which are

shared by two beams sharing the same node.

Section Name Specifies a beam section previously created using the beam library

• Value Type Allows you to define a bar/beam section either by Dimensions

(PBARL/PBEAML) or by Properties (PBAR/PBEAM). If Dimensions is

choosen, the MSC.Nastran’s built-in section library (Version 69 and

later), PBARL/PBEAML, will be used to define the bar/beam. If

Properties is chosen, the standard bar/beam properties, PBAR/PBEAM

will be used to define the beam section. If the Dimensions Option is set

to Dimensions, the Translation Parameters Version must be set to version

69 or later.

Material Name Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the

database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list

using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the setting of the MID

field on the PBCOMP entry. This property is required.

Bar Orientation Defines the local element coordinate system to be used for any cross-

sectional properties. This orientation will define the local XY plane,

where the x-axis is along the beam. This orientation, after any necessary

transformations, defines the value for the X1, X2, X3, or G0 fields on the

CBEAM entry. This property is required.

• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

When the value type is Vector, it is always input in either the Patran

global or some other Patran user defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0

Coord 5>).

118 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the bar orientation

vector will be written to the CBEAM entry:

OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. If Coord 0 is specified, a B will be

written.

Note: The reference coordinate system specified does not affect how the

input is interpreted within Patran. Only how it is written to the CBEAM

entry.

Offset @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the nodes to the shear centers of the beam cross

section. These orientations are defined as vectors. These properties, after

Offset @ Node 2 any necessary transformations, become the W1A, W2A, W3A, W1B,

W2B, and W3B fields on the CBEAM entry.

• Value Type Specifies how the bar orientation is defined:

controls how the vector input is interpreted in Patran.

• Reference Coordinates Specifies the MD Nastran coordinate system in which the offset vectors

will be written to the CBEAM entry and how the vector input will be

interpreted in Patran:

of the OFFT value on the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will

be interpreted to be in either the Patran global or some other Patran user

defined coordinate system (i.e. <0 1 0 Coord 5>). If Element is specified,

an E will be written to the second or third position of the OFFT value on

the CBEAM entry. Within Patran, the vector will be interpreted to be in

the Element coordinate system.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 119

Element Properties

Pinned DOFs @ Node 1 Indicates whether certain degrees of freedom are to be released. By

default, all degrees of freedom can transfer forces at the ends of beams.

Pinned DOFs @ Node 2 Pin or sliding type connections can be created by releasing specified

degrees of freedom. These degrees of freedom are in the element local

coordinate system. The values specified here are UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY,

RZ, or a combination. These properties define the settings of the PA and

PB fields on the CBEAM entry. These properties are optional.

Warping Option This specifies how contraints should be applied to the warping SPOINTs

of unmatched ends within the application region (see continuity rules

above). The choices available include “A free B free”,

“A fixed B fixed”, “A free B fixed”, “A fixed B free”, or “None”. The

choice of “None” is used to disable warping altogether for the current

element property set, in which case no SPOINTs will be generated or

constrained. Only unmatched ends within the application region will be

eligible for constraining, and whether or not a constraint is applied will

depend on the option selected, and whether the unmatched end is

“End A” or “End B” of its beam element. If no selection is made for this

element property, “A free B free” is selected by default.

Warp Coeff. @ Node 1 Specifies the warping coefficient at each end of the element. These

Warp Coeff. @ Node 2 properties are the CW(A) and CW(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These

values can be either real values or references to existing field definitions.

These properties are optional.

Station Distances Defines stations along each beam element where the section properties

will be defined. The values specified here are fractions of the beam

length. These values, therefore, are in the range of 0. to 1. These values

define the settings of the X/XB fields on the PBEAM record. This field

consists of a set of real values separated by legal delimiters, such as white

space and/or commas. If this list is entered, then the properties that

follow may also be in the form of lists consisting of the same number of

values. If they are in the form of a single real value, then that value will

apply to all stations of the beam element. This property is optional. If it

is not provided, then all other specified section properties apply to the

entire beam, and lists of values will not be accepted.

Cross-Sect. Areas Defines the cross sectional area of the element. This property defines the

settings of the A fields on the PBEAM record. This value can be either a

real value, a list (if a list of stations has been provided), or a reference to

an existing field definition, in which case a single real value will be

evaluated for each element of the application region. This property is

required.

120 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Inertias 1,1 Defines the various area moments of inertia of the cross section. These

Inertias 2,2 values define the settings of the I1, I2, and I12 fields on the PBEAM

Inertias 1,2 entry. These values are single real values that apply to the entire beam,

or a list of real values if a list of stations has been provided. These

properties are optional. If they are not provided, values of 0 will be

assumed.

Torsional Constants Defines the torsional stiffness parameters. This property defines the J

fields on the PBEAM entry. This value is a single real value that applies

to the entire beam, or a list of real values if a list of stations has been

provided. This property is optional. If it is not provided, a value of 0 will

be assumed.

Ys of C Points Defines the Y and Z locations in element coordinates, relative to the

Zs of C Points shear center, for stress data recovery. These define the C1, C2, D1, D2,

Ys of D Points E1, E2, F1, and F2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values are single

Zs of D Points

Ys of E Points real values that apply to the entire beam, or lists of real values if a list of

Zs of E Points stations has been provided. These properties are optional. If they are not

Ys of F Points provided, values of 0 will be assumed.

Zs of F Points

Nonstructural Masses Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the material of

the element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit length of the beam.

This property is the NSM field on the PBEAM entry. This value is a

single real value that applies to the entire beam, or a list of real values if

a list of stations has been provided. This property is optional. If it is not

provided, a value of 0 will be assumed.

NSM Inertia @ Node 1 Specifies the nonstructural mass moments of inertia per unit length about

NSM Inertia @ Node 2 the nonstructural mass center of gravity at each end of the element.

These properties are the NSI(A) and NSI(B) fields on the PBEAM entry.

These values can be either real values or references to existing field

definitions. These properties are optional.

Y of NSM @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the

Z of NSM @ Node 1 location of the nonstructural mass. These values are measured in the

Y of NSM @ Node 2 beam cross-section coordinate system. These are the M1(A), M2(A),

Z of NSM @ Node 2

M1(B), and M2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be

either real values or references to existing field definitions. These

properties are optional.

Shear Stiff, Y Defines the shear stiffness values. These properties are the K1 and K2

Shear Stiff, Z fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values or

references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 121

Element Properties

Shear Relief Y Defines the shear relief coefficients due to taper. These are the S1 and

Shear Relief Z S2 fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can either be real values or

references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Y of NA @ Node 1 Defines the offset from the shear center of the cross section to the

Z of NA @ Node 1 location of the neutral axis. These values are measured in the beam

Y of NA @ Node 2 cross-section coordinate system. These are the N1(A), N2(A), N1(B), and

Z of NA @ Node 2

N2(B) fields on the PBEAM entry. These values can be either real values

or references to existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

Warping due to torsion is enabled by generating MD Nastran SPOINTs to contain the warping degrees

of freedom. These SPOINTs are not actually present in the Patran database, and there is no way to

recover any results for these SPOINTs. They are created during analysis deck translation, and provide

the means to communicate to MD Nastran the continuity and constraint properties of the warping degrees

of freedom in the model. These attributes of continuity and constraint are implied in the Patran database

through the composition of the element properties application region and the set of options selected.

These continuity and constraint attributes apply to both warping SPOINTs and end release flags. This

connection of these attributes to the composition of the application region is new in Patran 2001r3, and

represents a change in behavior from previous versions of Patran. The general rules of implied continuity

are as follows.

1. Within the application region, two beam elements are taken to be continuous if a GRID ID at an

end of one of the beam elements matches a GRID ID at one of the ends of the other beam element.

If a third beam element in the same application region also contains the same GRID ID, it is

assumed that none of the beam elements is continuous at this location. This condition is known

as a “multiple junction”. Similarly, if none of the other beam elements in the application region

contain a matching GRID ID, the corresponding end of the beam element is taken to be not

continuous. This condition is known as an “unmatched end”.

2. If warping is enabled, then all instances of beam element continuity must have the matching

GRID ID located at “End A” of one of the beam elements and at “End B” of the other. “End A”

and “End B” positions are determined by the order of GRID IDs specified in the element

connectivity array, and the positive direction of the x-axis of the element coordinate system points

from “End A” to “End B”. If warping is not enabled, this restiction does not apply. If warping is

enabled, any violation of this requirement will result in a failure to complete the translation of the

finite element model. In this event, the user will have to reverse the direction of the improperly

oriented beam elements and initiate the translation again.

3. When warping is enabled, all positions of beam element continuity within an application region

will be represented by a single SPOINT at each of these positions, which will be generated at the

time of analysis deck translation and will appear on the CBEAM entries for the appropriate end

of both of the beam elements that are continuous at each location. If any end release codes have

been prescribed for the application region, they will not be applied at locations of beam element

continuity. This is new for Patran 2001r3. For earlier versions of Patran, end release codes would

be applied to all elements of the application region, regardless of continuity.

122 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

4. When warping is enabled, individual SPOINTs are generated for all beam ends that are not

continuous. This applies to both “multiple junctions” and “unmatched ends”.

5. The specified end release codes are applied to all discontinuous beam element ends in the

application region, whether “multiple junction” or “unmatched end”, with the applied end release

codes dependent on what has been prescribed for “End A” and “End B” for the application region.

If no end release codes have been prescribed for the application region, none are generated.

6. When warping is enabled, and for unmatched ends only (not multiple junctions), constraints

applied to the SPOINTs are specified by the “warping option” specified in the element properties

form. For example, if “A free B fixed” has been selected and the unmatched end is “End A” of

its beam element, it will not be constrained. If it is “End B” of its element, it will be constrained.

The warping SPOINT for a beam element end involved in a multiple junction will not be

constrained under any circumstances. If the user wishes to constrain warping for a beam element

involved in a multiple junction, he will have to do so by splitting the application region in such a

way that the beam element end becomes an “unmatched end” within its new application region.

7. Warping is considered to be enabled when a value has been specified for the warping coefficient

at either end of the beam element. When the user selects the “Beam Library” option, values for

the warping coefficient get computed autamatically, and thus warping is implicitly enabled. If the

user wishes to disable warping while using the Beam Library option, he must choose “None” as

his “Warping Option” on the “Input Properties ...” form.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Rod General Section Bar/2

Standard

Use this form to create a CROD element and a PROD property. This defines a tension-

compression-torsion element of the structural model.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 123

Element Properties

124 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the cross-sectional area of the Defines the material to be used. A list of all

element. This is the A field on the materials currently in the database is displayed

PROD entry. This value can be either a when data is entered. Either select from the list

real value or a reference to an existing using the mouse or type in the name. This defines

field definition. This property is the setting of the MID field on the PROD entry.

required. This property is required.

stress. This is the C field on the PROD entry. Defines mass not included in the

This property can be either a real value or a mass derived from the material of the

reference to an existing field definition. This element. This property is defined in

property is optional. terms of mass per unit length of the

beam. This is the NSM field on the

PROD entry. This value can be either

a real value or a reference to an

existing field definition. This property

is optional.

is the J field on the PROD entry. This value can

be either a real value or a reference to an

existing field definition. This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 125

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Rod General Section Bar/2

CONROD

element of the structural model.

126 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when

data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This defines the

setting of the MID field on the CONROD entry. This property is required.

sectional area of

the element. This

property is the A

field on the

CONROD entry.

This value can be

either a real value

or a reference to

an existing field

definition. This

property is

required.

included in the

mass derived from

the material of the

element. This

property is defined

in terms of mass

per unit length of

the beam and is

the NSM field on

the CONROD

entry. This value

can be either a

real value or a

reference to an

existing field

definition. This

property is

optional.

stress. This property is the C field on the CONROD

entry and can either be a real value or a reference to

an existing field definition. This property is optional.

is the J field on the CONROD entry. This value can either

be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition.

This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 127

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Rod Pipe Section Bar/2

Use this form to create a CTUBE element and a PTUBE property. This defines a tension-

compression-torsion element with a thin-walled tube cross section.

128 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the tube outer diameters at each end of the element. These are the OD and OD2

fields on the PTUBE entry. These values can either be real values or references to existing

field definitions. The outer diameter at Node 1 property is required. The outer diameter at

Node 2 Property is optional.

Defines the

material to be

used. A list of all

materials currently

in the database is

displayed when

data is entered.

This property

defines the setting

of the MID field on

the PTUBE entry.

Either select from

the list using the

mouse, or type in

the name. This

property is

required.

Defines mass not

included in the

mass derived

from the material

of the element.

This property is

defined in terms

of mass per unit

length of the

beam and is the

NSM field on the

PRTUBE entry.

This value can be

either a real value

or reference to an

existing field

definition. This

property is

optional.

Specifies the wall thickness of the pipe. This is the T field on the PTUBE

entry. This value can either be a real value or a reference to an existing

field definition. This property is required.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Spring Bar/2

Chapter 2: Building A Model 129

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CELAS1 or CELAS1D (for SOL 700) element and a PELAS property.

This defines a scalar spring of the structural model.

130 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the coefficient to be used for this Defines what damping is to be included.

spring. This property is the K field on the This property is the GE field on the PELAS

PELAS entry and can be either a real value entry and can be either a real value or a

or a reference to an existing field definition. reference to an existing field definition. This

This property is required. property is optional.

Defines which

degree of

freedom this

value is to be

attached to at

each node. The

degree of

freedom can be

set to UX, UY,

UZ, RX, RY, or

RZ. These

properties

define the

settings of the

C1 and C2 fields

on the CELAS1

entry. These

properties are

required.

Defines the relationship between the spring Number of a User Defined Coordinate

deflection and the stresses within the spring. system, used only for Explicit Nonlinear

This property is the S field on the PELAS (SOL 700). This property is optional.

entry and can be either a real value or a

reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model 131

Element Properties

Create 1D Damper Scalar Bar/2

Use this form to create a CDAMP1 or CDAMP1D (for SOL 700) element and a PDAMP property. This

defines a scalar damper element of the structural model.

132 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

be used. This is the B field on the PDAMP

entry and can either be a real value or a

Number of a User Defined reference to an existing field definition.

Coordinate system, used This property is optional.

only for Explicit Nonlinear

(SOL 700). This property is

optional.

will be attached to at each node. This can be

set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ. These

define the settings of the C1 and C2 field on

the CDAMP1 entry. These properties are

required.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Damper Viscous Bar/2

Chapter 2: Building A Model 133

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CVISC element and a PVISC property. This defines a viscous damper element

of the structural model.

This is the C1 field on the PVISC entry. This This is the C2 field on the PVISC entry. This

property can either be a real value or a property can either be a real value or a

reference to an existing field definition. This reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional. property is optional.

Gap (CGAP)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Gap Adaptive Bar/2

Nonadaptive

Use this form to create a CGAP element and a PGAP property. This defines a gap or frictional

element of the structural model for non-linear analysis.

134 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

coordinate system for this

element that can be

defined in one of three

ways. If the two end nodes

of the gap are not

coincident, then the Gap

Orientation can reference

a vector or a node ID. This

local x-axis would then run

between the two end

nodes and the orientation

information would define

the local xy plane.

However, if the two end

nodes are coincident, then

the Gap Orientation refers

to an existing coordinate

system definition and will

be used as the local

element coordinate

system. This Gap

Orientation defines the

settings of the X1, X2, X3,

G0, and CID fields on the

CGAP entry. This property

is required.

of the gap element. The

nodal coordinates are

only used to define the

closure direction. This

property is the U0 field on

the PGAP entry and can

be either a real value or a

reference to an existing

field definition. This

property is optional.

Defines the artificial stiffness of the gap when the gap is open or closed.

The closed stiffness should be chosen to closely match the stiffness of the

surrounding elements. The open stiffness should be approximately 10

orders of magnitude less. These properties are the Ka and Kb fields on the

PGAP entry and can either be real value or references to existing field

definitions. The closed stiffness property is required. The opened stiffness

property is optional.

Defines an initial preload across an initially closed gap. For example, this can be used for

initial thread loading. If the gap is initially open, setting this value to the initial opening

stiffness will improve the solution convergence. This is the F0 field on the PGAP entry and

can either be a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is

optional.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CGAP element and a PGAP property that were

not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these

Chapter 2: Building A Model 135

Element Properties

properties.

Sliding Stiffness Defines the artificial shear stiffness of the element when the element is

closed. This is the Kt field on the PGAP entry. This property can be

either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Static Friction Defines the static friction coefficient. This property is the MU1 field on

the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar or a

spatially varying real scalar field.

Kinematic Friction Defines the kinematic friction coefficient. This property is the MU2

field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real scalar

or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Max Penetration Defines the maximum allowable penetration. This property is the

TMAX field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real

scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Max Adjust Ratio Defines the maximum allowable adjustment ratio. This property is the

MAR field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real

scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Penet. Lower Bound Defines the lower bound for the allowable penetration. This is the

TRMIN field on the PGAP entry. This value is optional and can be a real

scalar or a spatially varying real scalar field.

Friction Coeff. y Defines the coefficient of friction when sliding occurs along this

element in the local y and z directions. These are the MU1 and MU2

Friction Coeff. Z fields on the PGAP entry and can be either real values or references to

existing field definitions. These properties are optional.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D 1D Mass Bar/2

136 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CMASS1 element and a PMASS property. This defines a scalar mass element of

the structural model.

Defines the translation mass or rotational Defines which degree of freedom this value

inertia value to be applied. This property is the will be attached to at each node. These can be

M field on the PMASS entry and can either be set to UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY, or RZ and defines

a real value or a reference to an existing field the settings of the C1 and C2 field on the

definition. This property is required. CMASS1 entry. These properties are required.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 137

Element Properties

PLOTEL

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D PLOTEL Bar/2

define the PLOTEL property set.

(Scalar) Bush

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element

Properties form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Bush Bar/2

138 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Node Id or CID.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 139

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view

these properties.

Bush Orientation Element orientation strategy keys off of CID specification. If CID

is blank, the element x-axis lies along the line which joins the

elements grid points (GA, GB Element Properties/Application

Region). The X-Y plane is determined by specifying the Bush

Orientation. If a vector input is given, these components define an

orientation vector v from the first grid point (GA) of the element in

the displacement coordinate system at that point (GA). If the Bush

Orientation references a grid point ID (Value), this orientation point

forms an orientation vector which extends from the first element

grid point to the orientation point.

X,Y, and Z axes are aligned with the coordinate system principal

axes. If the CID is for a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system,

the first elemental grid point (GA) is used to locate the system. If

CID = 0, the elemental coordinate system is the Basic Coordinate

System.

the line which connects the element’s grid points. The material

property inputs for this condition must be limited to simple axial

and torsional stiffness and damping (k1,k4,B1,B4).

Offset Location Offset Location (0.0 s 1.0) specifies the spring-damper

location along the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB by setting the

fraction of the distance from GRIDGA. s=0.50 centers the spring-

damper.

Offset Orientation System Specifies the coordinate system used to locate the spring-damper

offset when it is not on the line from GRIDGA to GRIDGB.

Offset Orientation Vector Provides the location of the spring-damper in space relative to the

offset coordinate system. If the offset orientation system is -1 or

blank, the offset orientation vector is ignored.

140 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Spring Constant 1 Defines the stiffness associated with a particular degree of freedom.

Spring Constant 2 This property is defined in terms of force per unit displacement and

Spring Constant 3 can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition

Spring Constant 4

Spring Constant 5 for defining stiffness vs. frequency.

Spring Constant 6

Stiff. Freq Depend 1

Stiff. Freq Depend 2

Stiff. Freq Depend 3

Stiff. Freq Depend 4

Stiff. Freq Depend 5

Stiff. Freq Depend 6

Stiff. Force/Disp 1 Defines the nonlinear force/displacement curves for each degree of

Stiff. Force/Disp 2 freedom of the spring-damper system.

Stiff. Force/Disp 3

Stiff. Force/Disp 4

Stiff. Force/Disp 5

Stiff. Force/Disp 6

Damping Coefficient 1 Defines the force per velocity damping value for each degree of

Damping Coefficient 2 freedom. This property can be either a real value or a reference to

Damping Coefficient 3 an existing field definition for defining damping vs. frequency

Damping Coefficient 4

Damping Coefficient 5

Damping Coefficient 6

Damp. Freq Depend 1

Damp. Freq Depend 2

Damp. Freq Depend 3

Damp. Freq Depend 4

Damp. Freq Depend 5

Damp. Freq Depend 6

Structural Damping Defines the non-dimensional structural damping coefficient (GE1).

Struc. Damp Freq Depend This property can be either a real value, or a reference to an existing

field definition for defining damping vs. frequency.

Stress Recovery Translation Stress Recovery Coefficients. The element stress are computed by

Stress Recovery Rotation multiplying the stress coefficients with the recovered element

forces.

Strain Recovery Translation Strain Recovery Coefficients. The element strains are computed by

Strain Recovery Rotation multiplying the strain coefficients with the recovered element

strains.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 141

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Spot Weld Connector

Connector

142 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Note that SPOTWELD properties are created automatically (or pre-existing properties selected) when

creating Spotwelds through the Finite Elements application. Therefore no application region is required

(or presented) in the element properties application when defining or modifying spotweld properties

because the existence of the spotweld itself is the application region for the property set.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 143

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 1D Fastener Connector

Connector

144 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Note that FASTENER properties are created automatically (or pre-existing properties selected) when

creating Fasteners through the Finite Elements application. Therefore no application region is required

(or presented) in the element properties application when defining or modifying fastener properties

because the existence of the fastener itself is the application region for the property set.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 145

Element Properties

String

None

Douglas

Huth Hi-Lok in CFRP

Huth Hi-Lok in metal

Huth solid rivet

Note that Douglas or one of several Huth formulations can be used to calculate stiffness values of fastener

connections automatically, minimizing the need for manual calculation.

Stiffness coefficients for the CFAST element are calculated in different steps. Generally, either Douglas

or three derivatives of Huth formulas are used. Regardless of the selected formula, the axial stiffness is

always calculated the same way:

1

E f --- Ãd 2

4 f

k = --------------------

l

The stiffness is inserted into the KT1 parameter of the PFAST entry. The length of the fastener will be

determined by summation of the thickness of the two connected shell elements.

The Douglas formula is*:

1

k = ---

c

5 1 1

c = ---------- + 0.8 ---------- + ----------

df Ef t E t 2 E 2

1 1

k = 1

---

c

a

t 1 + t 2 1 1 1 1

- ----------

c = b -------------- + ---------- + ------------- + -------------

2d t E t 2 E 2 2E f t 1 2E f t 2

f 1 1

a b

Hi-Lok in CFRP 0.6667 4.2

146 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

a b

Hi-Lok in metal 0.6667 3.0

Solid Rivet 0.4 2.2

In the case of composites, the Douglas and Huth formulas have to be used twice. First, the overall

(engineering) Young’s modulus has to be calculated for both directions (E11 and E22), which then has to

be applied to the formulas. In this case, the shear stillness of the fastener is direction dependent. For

composites or anisotrophic material, the material tensors of the two connected shell elements have to be

transformed into the coordinate system of the CFAST element before the Douglas or Huth formula is

applied. The resulting stiffness is applied to the KT2 and KT3 parameters on the PFAST entry.

* The following symbols are used in the formulas:

Symbol Meaning

Ef Young’s modulus of fastener

df Diameter of fastener

l Length of fastener, evaluated from the FE model

E1 Young’s modulus of first property connected to the fastener

t1 Thickness of first property connected to the fastener

E2 Young’s modulus of second property connected to the fastener

t2 Thickness of second property connected to the fastener

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CQUAD4, CTRIA3, CQUAD8, or CTRIA6 element and a PSHELL

property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested

behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 147

Element Properties

148 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the

material to be

used. A list of all

materials currently

in the database is

displayed when

data is entered.

Either select one

from the list using

the mouse or type

in the name. This

defines the

settings of the

MID1, MID2,

MID3, and MID4

fields on the

PSHELL entry.

This property is

required.

Defines the

thickness, which

will be uniform

over each

element. This

value can either

be a real value or

a reference to an

existing field

definition. This

property defines

the T1, T2, T3,

and T4 fields on

the CQUAD4/8

and CTRIA3/6

entries and/or the

T field on the

PSHELL entry.

This property is

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the required.

element. There are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a

coordinate system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) define a

vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant

angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the

setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUADi or CTRIAi entry. This

scalar value can either be a constant value in degrees, a vector, or a

reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Defines the mass not derived from the material of the element. This is

defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element. This is the NSM field

on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to

an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 149

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUADi and a CTRIAi element and a PSHELL

property, that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form

to view these properties.

Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane

defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the

CQUAD4/8 entry and can be either a real value or a reference to an

existing field definition. This property is optional.

Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the bottom

and top most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the

Fiber Dist. 2 Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or

references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values

Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for

implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not

specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on

the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if

the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the

PSHLN1/2 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the

PSHLN1/2 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it

not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or

detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based

on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a

Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution

Type, 366.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4

Revised Formulation

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The

appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank to achieve the requested behavior.

150 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model 151

Element Properties

Defines the mass not included in the mass derived from the

material of the element. This property is defined in terms of

mass per unit area of the element. and this is the NSM field

on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or

a reference to an existing field definition. This property is

optional.

152 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an

adaptive, p-element analysis.

Create 2D Shell Homogeneous Tri/3, Quad/4,Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7,

Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13,

P-Formulation Quad/16

Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The

appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested

behavior.The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore,

the MD Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 153

Element Properties

Defines the

material to be

used. A list of all

materials

currently in the

database is

displayed when

data is entered.

Either select from

the list using the

mouse or type in

the name. This

property defines

the settings of the

MID1, MID2,

MID3, and MID4

fields on the

PSHELL entry.

This property is

required.

from the element’s

reference plane to

the top and bottom

most extreme fibers

respectively. These

properties are the

Z1 and Z2 fields on

the PSHELL entry

and can be either

real values or

references to

existing field

definitions. These

properties are

optional.

Defines the mass not included in the Defines a uniform thickness, which will

mass derived from the material of the cover each element. This property defines

element. This property is defined in terms the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the

of mass per unit area of the element and CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the T

this is the NSM field on the PSHELL field on the PSHELL entry and can be

entry. This value can be either a real either a real value or a reference to

value or a reference to an existing field existing field definition. This property is

definition. This property is optional. required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are two ways to

assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate

system is the material x-axis (2) define a constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of the basic

system.This defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This

property is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element, that were not

shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these

154 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

properties.

Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane

defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the

CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and can be either a real value or a

reference to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and

bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the

Fiber Dist. 2 Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real values or

references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.

Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined

Maximum P-orders by the P--order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-

orders apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process

will limit the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum

P-orders. These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.

P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this

coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the

CID field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag that controls whether or not this set of elements participates in the

error analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle

to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.

Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.

By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the

ADAPT entry.

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate

in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the

SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate

in the error analysis.By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the

EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Shell Laminate Tri/3, Quad/4

Chapter 2: Building A Model 155

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PCOMP property.

Laminate Options Laminate option placed on the LAM field of the PCOMP/PCOMPG

entry. No option implies all plies must be specified and all stiffness

terms developed. MEM - all plies are specified but only membrane

terms are computed. BEND - all plies specified but only bending terms

computed. SMEAR - all plies specified, stacking sequence ignored

and TS/T and 12I/T**3 terms set to zero. SMCORE - all plies

specified with the last ply specifying core properties and the previous

plies specifying face sheet properties. See the Nastran Quick

Reference Guide for more details.

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values

Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for

implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not

specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based

on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or

if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the

PSHLN1/2 entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the

PSHLN1/2 entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it

not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or

detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based

on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining

a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear

Solution Type, 366.

Note: TREF is written to PCOMP from the value defined on the first MAT8 entry defined in the

composite, or in other words, from the material of the first ply in the layup. The value of

GE is written to PCOMP as the sum of all GE values on all plies, scaled based on the

percentage thickness of each ply. To get values for TREF and GE from the PCOMP entry,

the 2D/Shell/Thin/Laminate/Standard and Revised formulations need to have property

words used to define these values. If the values are not defined then the values are retrieved

from the MAT8 material card.

156 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

be used. A list of all

materials currently in

the database is

displayed when data is

entered. Either select

from the list using the

mouse or type the

name in. The specified

material must be a

laminate material in

Patran. The data in this

material definition

defines the settings of

the MIDi, Ti, and

THETAi fields on the

PCOMP entry. This

property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic Defines mass not included in the mass derived

material within the element. There are three ways to from the material of the element. This is the NSM

assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate field on the PCOMP entry. This property is defined

system, which is then projected onto the element, (2) in terms of mass per unit area of the element and

define a vector that will be projected onto the element, can be either a real value or a reference to an

or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default existing field definition. This property is optional.

element coordinate system. This property defines the

setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3,

CTRIA6 CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar

value can either be a constant value or a reference to

an existing coordinate system. This property is Defines the offset of the element‘s reference plane

optional. from the plane defined by the nodal locations. This is

the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or

CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real value or

a reference to an existing field definition. This property

is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 157

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Shell Laminate Tri/3, Quad/4

Revised Formulation

158 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CQUADR or CTRIAR element and a PCOMP property.

Defines mass not included in the mass materials currently in the database is displayed

derived from the material of the when data is entered. Either select from the list

element. This is the NSM field on the using the mouse or type in the name. The specified

PCOMP entry. This property is defined material must be a laminate material in Patran. The

in mass per unit area, of the element. data in this material definition defines the settings of

This value can be either a real value or the MIDi, Ti, and THETAi fields on the PCOMP

a reference to an existing field entry. This property is required.

definition. This property is optional.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are three

ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then projected onto the

element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle

offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the setting of the THETA or

MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or

a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

See Standard Laminate Plate (CQUAD4/PCOMP), 154 for a description of the SOL 400 Laminate

and Nonlinear Formulation options.

Note: TREF is written to PCOMP from the value defined on the first MAT8 entry defined in the

composite, or in other words, from the material of the first ply in the layup. The value of

GE is written to PCOMP as the sum of all GE values on all plies, scaled based on the

percentage thickness of each ply. To get values for TREF and GE from the PCOMP entry,

the 2D/Shell/Thin/Laminate/Standard and Revised formulations need to have property

words used to define these values. If the values are not defined then the values are retrieved

from the MAT8 material card.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 159

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL

property. The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the

requested behavior.

160 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling behavior

of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is entered.

These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL

entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties are optional.

material within the element. There are three ways to

assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate

system, which is then projected onto the element,

(2) define a vector that will be projected onto the

element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from

the default element coordinate system. This defines

Defines the uniform thickness for each the setting of the THETA field on the CTRIA3,

element. This property defines the CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar

setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 fields on value can be either a constant value or a reference

the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or to an existing coordinate system. This property is

CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the optional.

PSHELL entry. This value can be either

a real value or a reference to an existing

field definition. This property is required.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8

Chapter 2: Building A Model 161

Element Properties

element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on

the Input Properties form to view these properties.

Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This is the 12I/T3 field on the

PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference to an

existing field definition. This property is optional.

Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane

thickness. This property is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This

value can be either a real value or a reference to an existing field

definition. This property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the

element. This is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the element.

This property is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be

either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane defined

by the nodal locations. This property is the ZOFFS field on the CTRIA3,

CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This value can be either a real

value or a reference to an existing field definition. This property is

optional.

Fiber Distance 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and

bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties are the Z1

Fiber Distance 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real

values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are

optional.

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values

Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for

implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not

specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on

the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the

elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2

entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2

entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be

written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the

usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on

the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See Static

Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 366.

162 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4

Revised Formulation

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The

appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested

behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 163

Element Properties

Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling

behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is

entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the

PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties

are optional.

Defines the uniform thickness, which will be Defines the basic orientation for any non-

used for each element. This property isotropic material within the element. There

defines the setting of the Ti, T2, T3, and T4 are three ways to assign this definition: (1)

fields on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry reference a coordinate system which is then

and/or the T field on the PSHELL entry. projected onto the element, (2) define a

This value can be either a real value or a vector that will be projected onto the

references to an existing field definition. element, or (3) define a constant angle offset

This property is required. from the default element coordinate system.

This property defines the setting of the

THETA field on the CQUADR or CTRIAR

entry. This scalar value can either be a

constant value or a reference to an existing

coordinate system. This property is optional.

164 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL

property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form

to view these properties.

Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field

on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference

to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane

thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be

either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the

element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the

element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be

either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Fiber Distance 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and

bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties are the Z1

Fiber Distance 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real

values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are

optional.

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values

Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for

implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not

specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on

the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the

elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSHLN1/2

entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSHLN1/2

entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be

written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the

usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting

on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See

Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 366.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 165

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an

adaptive, p-element analysis.

Create 2D Shell Equivalent Section Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6,

Quad/8, Tri/7, Quad/9,

P-Formulation Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13,

Quad/16

Use this form to create a CQUAD4, or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The

appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested

behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore,

the MSC. Nastran Version in the Translation Parameter form must be set to 69.

166 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the materials to be used to describe the membrane, bending, shear, and coupling

behavior of the element. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when data is

entered. These properties define the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields, on the

PSHELL entry. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. These properties

are optional.

will be used for each element. This Defines the basic orientation for any non-

property defines the setting of the Ti, isotropic material within the element. There are

T2, T3, and T4 fields on the CTRIAR3 two ways to assign this definition: (1) reference

or CQUAD4 entry and/or the T field on a coordinate system, then the projected x-axis

the PSHELL entry. This value can be of the coordinate system is the material x-axis

either a real value or a references to an (2) define a constant angle offset from the

existing field definition. This property is projected x-axis of basic system.This property

required. is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties, available for creating a CQUAD4 and a CTRIA3 element that were not

shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form to view these

Chapter 2: Building A Model 167

Element Properties

properties.

Bending Stiffness Defines the bending stiffness parameter. This property is the 12I/T3 field

on the PSHELL entry. This value can be either a real value or a reference

to an existing field definition. This property is optional.

Thickness Ratio Defines the ratio of transverse shear thickness to the membrane

thickness. This is the TS/T field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be

either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the

element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the

element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be

either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Plate Offset Defines the offset of the element’s reference plane from the plane

defined by the nodal locations. This is the ZOFFS field on the CQUAD4

or CTRIA3entry and can be either real value or reference to an existing

field definition. This property is optional.

Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and

bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the Z1

Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and can be either real value or

references to existing field definitions. This property is optional.

Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.

Maximum P-orders Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined

by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders

apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit

the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders.

These are the Polyi fields in the PVAL entry.

P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this

coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the CID

field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error

analysis. This is the ERREST field in the ADAPT entry.

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle

to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.

Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By

default, equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

168 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in

the error analysis. By default, equal to 0.0. This is the SIGTOL field on

the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in

the error analysis. By default, equal to1.0E-8. This is the EPSTOL field

on the ADAPT entry.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Shell Field Point Mesh Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CQUAD4 elements for creating acoustic field point

mesh for an exterior acoustics analysis. No property cards are created. The material referenced

should be the same as that defined for the 3D solid elements and exterior acoustic infinite elements used

to define the surrounding fluid environment of the structure, although no actual materials is written. In

order to recover results on these meshes, you must set the output request ACFPFRESULT.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 169

Element Properties

Each acoustic field point mesh defined is written to a seperate section of the bulk data using the BEGIN

AFPM=id.

Input Properties

170 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Bending Panel Standard Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Tri/6, Quad/8

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property.

The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested

behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 171

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed

when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This

property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL

entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any element. This defines the T1, T2, T3,

non-isotropic material within the and T4 fields on the CQUAD4/8 and

element. There are three ways to assign CTRIA3/6 entries and/or the T field on

this definition: (1) reference a coordinate the PSHELL entry. This value can be

system which is then projected onto the either a real value or a reference to an

element, (2) define a vector that will be existing field definition. This property is

projected onto the element, or (3) define required.

a constant angle offset from the default

element coordinate system. This

property defines the setting of the

THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, Defines the mass not derived from

CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. the material of the element. This

This scalar value can either be a property is defined in mass per unit

constant value or a reference to an area of the element and is the NSM

existing coordinate system. This field on the PSHELL entry. This value

property is optional. can be either a real value or a

reference to an existing field

definition. This property is optional.

172 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4 or CQUAD8

element and a PSHELL property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on

the Input Properties form to view these properties.

Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and

bottom most extreme fibers respectively. These properties define the Z1

Fiber Dist. 2 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry and these values can be either real

values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are

optional.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Bending Panel Revised Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The

appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested

behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 173

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database

is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or

type in the name. This property defines the settings of the MID1, MID2, MID3,

and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

any non-isotropic material within

the element. There are three ways

to assign this definition: (1) Defines the uniform thickness, which will

reference a coordinate system, be used for each element. This defines

which is then projected onto the the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the

element, (2) define a vector that CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the

will be projected onto the element, T field on the PSHELL entry. This value

or (3) define a constant angle can be either a real value or a reference

offset from the default element to an existing field definitions. This

coordinate system. This defines property is required.

the setting of the THETA or MCID

field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR Defines the mass not

entry. This scalar value can either Defines the distance from

the element’s reference included in the mass

be a constant value or a reference derived from the material

to an existing coordinate system. plane to the top and bottom

most extreme fibers, of the element. This is

This property is optional. defined in terms of mass

respectively. These

properties are the Z1 and Z2 per unit area of the

fields on the PSHELL entry. element. This is the NSM

These values can be either field on the PSHELL

real values or references to entry. This value can

existing field definitions. This either be real values or a

property is optional. reference to and existing

field definition. This

property is optional.

174 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an

adaptive, p-element analysis.

Create 2D Bending Panel P- Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8,

Tri/7, Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12,

Tri/13, Quad/16

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL property. The

appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested

behavior. The p-formulation shell element is supported in MSC . Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore,

the MSC .Nastran Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 175

Element Properties

database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using

the mouse or type in the name. This property defines the settings of the

MID1, MID2, MID3, and MID4 fields on the PSHELL entry. This property is

required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic be used for each element. This defines

material within the element. There are two ways to the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on the

assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry and/or the

system, then the projected x-axis of the coordinate T field on the PSHELL entry and this value

system is the material x-axis or (2) define a can be either a real value or a reference to

constant angle offset from the projected x-axis of an existing field definition. This property is

basic system.This property defines the setting of required.

the THETA or MCID field on the CQUAD4 or

CTRIA3 entry. This property is optional.

This is a list of Input Properties available for creating a CTRIA3 or CQUAD4 element and a PSHELL

property that were not shown on the previous page. Use the menu scroll bar on the Input Properties form

176 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Nonstructural Mass Defines mass not included in the mass derived from the material of the

element. This property is defined in terms of mass per unit area of the

element. This is the NSM field on the PSHELL entry. This value can be

either a real value or a reference to an existing field definition. This

property is optional.

Fiber Dist. 1 Defines the distance from the element’s reference plane to the top and

bottom most extreme fibers, respectively. These properties define the

Fiber Dist. 2 Z1 and Z2 fields on the PSHELL entry. These values can be either real

values or references to existing field definitions. These properties are

optional.

Starting P-orders and Polynomial orders for displacement representation within elements.

Each contains a list of three integers referring to the directions defined

Maximum P-orders by the P-order Coordinate System (default elemental). Starting P-orders

apply to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit

the polynomial orders to the values specified in Maximum P-orders.

These are the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.

P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this

coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the CID

field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error

analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle

to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.

Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete. By

default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the

ADAPT entry.

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in

the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the

SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in

the error analysis. By default this value is equal to1.0E-8. This is the

EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 177

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Tri/3, Tri/6

Use this form to create a CTRIAX6 axisymmetric solid element. This defines an isoparametric and

axisymmetric triangular cross section ring element with midside nodes.

178 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There

are three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is

then projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the

element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate

system. This defines the setting of the TH field on the CTRIAX6 entry. This scalar

value can be either a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system.

This property is optional.

all materials currently in the database is

displayed when data is entered. Either

select from the list using the mouse or

type in the name. This defines the setting

of the MID field on the CTRIAX6 entry.

This property is required.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric Hyperelastic Tri/3, Tri/6, QUAD/4,

QUAD/8

PLPLANE

Use this form to create axisymmetric solid elements. This defines an isoparametric and axisymmetric

cross section ring element with or without midside nodes.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 179

Element Properties

options are “GAUS” (default) or “GRID.”

this defines the STR field on the

PLPLANE entry.

For SOL600 solutions use the PLPLANE option and any

material type. For non-SOL600 runs, use the

Hypereleastic option with Mooney-Rivlin materials.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D 2D Solid Laminate CQUADX

The DIRECT field of these cards is negative for the "Total" option where ply thicknesses are the actual

thicknesses and positive for the "Total - %thicknesses" option where ply thicknesses are defined as

percentages of the total ply stack thickness.

180 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material

of all materials currently in the within the element. There are three ways to assign this

database is displayed when data is definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then

entered. Either select from the list projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be

using the mouse or type in the name. projected onto the element, or (3) define a constant angle

This property defines the PLCOMP offset from the default element coordinate system. This scalar

entry to be used. This property is value can either be a constant value or a reference to an

required. existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release.

used as base ply

orientation.

axisymmetric elements

Chapter 2: Building A Model 181

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property.

The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested

behavior.

182 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is

displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the

name. This property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2

field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is

required.

The orientation of the material directions

does not change the stiffness of the model.

can be specified by the Material

Orientation parameter value CID, Real

Scalar, or Vector.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4

Revised Formulation

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields

on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 183

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when

data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property

defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. The MID2 field on the PSHELL entry will

be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior. This property is required.

184 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an

adaptive, p-element analysis.

Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7,

Quad/9, Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13,

P- Formulation Quad/16

Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields

on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-

formulation shell element is supported in MSC .Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC. Nastran

Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 185

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed when

data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse, or type in the name. This property

defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required. The MID2

field on the PSHELL entry will be set to -1 to define plane strain behavior.

material within the element. There are two ways Polynomial orders for displacement

to assign this definition: (1) reference a representation within elements. Each

coordinate system, then the projected x-axis of contains a list of three integers referring to

the coordinate system is the material x-axis the directions defined by the P-order

(2) define a constant angle offset from the Coordinate System (default elemental).

projected x-axis of basic system. This defines the Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive

setting of the THETA or MCID field on the cycle. The adaptive analysis process will limit

CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This property is the polynomial orders to the values specified

optional. in Maximum P-orders. These are the Polyi

fields on the PVAL entry.

186 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this

coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the

CID field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error

analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle

to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.

Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.

By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the

ADAPT entry.

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in

the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the

SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in

the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the

EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

These elements are used in exterior acoustic analysis (frequency response) and placed on the outside of

the solid mesh representing the fluid (coincident with the outside surface). The must share the same nodes

as the solid mesh. They simulate the fluid proprties reaching to infinity beyond the boundary of the solid

mesh representing the fluid. The surfaces that these elements connect to must be convex. However it is

not necessary that the surface be smooth. They also take on the same fluid proprties as the solid fluid

mesh.

Create 2D 2D Solid Infinite Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CACINF3, CACINF4 elements and a PACINF property. The appropriate fields

on the PACINF entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 187

Element Properties

interpolation order, which must be

defined and greater than zero. Defines the material to be used. This

material is generally the same material used

to define the solid fluid mesh in an exterior

acoustics analysis (MAT10). The same

The pole of the acoustic infinite material should also be referenced when

elements. This must be coorinate using acoustic field point meshes.

location defined in the global Patran

coordinate system. A node ID can also

be selected graphically.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D 2D Solid Laminate QUAD/4, QUAD/8

The DIRECT field of these cards is negative for the "Total" option where ply thicknesses are the actual

thicknesses and positive for the "Total - %thicknesses" option where ply thicknesses are defined as

percentages of the total ply stack thickness.

188 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

material within the element. There are three ways

to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate

system, which is then projected onto the element,

Defines the material to be used. A list of all (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the

materials currently in the database is element, or (3) define a constant angle offset from

displayed when data is entered. Either select the default element coordinate system. This scalar

from the list using the mouse or type in the value can either be a constant value or a reference

name. This property defines the PLCOMP to an existing coordinate system. This property is

entry to be used. This property is required. optional.

Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release.

used as base ply

orientation.

axisymmetric elements

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model 189

Element Properties

Create 2D Membrane Standard Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 element and a PSHELL property.

The appropriate fields on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested

behavior.

190 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed

when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This

property defines the settings of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the mass not derived from the Defines the uniform thickness that will

material of the element. This property be used for each element. This value

is defined in mass per unit area of the can either be a real value or reference

element and is the NSM field on the an existing field definition. This property

PSHELL entry. This value can be either defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on

a real value or a reference to an the CTRIA3, CTRIA6, CQUAD4, or

existing field definition. This property is CQUAD8 entry and/or the T field on the

optional. PSHELL entry. This property is

required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There

are three ways to assign this definition: (1)reference a coordinate system, which is then

projected onto the element. (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element,

or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This

property defines the setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIA3, CTRIA6,

CQUAD4, or CQUAD8 entry. This scalar value can either be a constant value or a

reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is optional.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model 191

Element Properties

Create 2D Membrane Revised Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4

Use this form to create a CTRIAR or CQUADR element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields

on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior.

192 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the mass not derived from the used. A list of all materials

material of the element. This property is currently in the database is

defined in terms of mass per unit area of displayed when data is

the element and is the NSM field on the entered. Either select from the

PSHELL entry. This value can be either a list using the mouse or type in

real value or a reference to an existing the name. This defines the

field definition. This property is optional. settings of the MID1 field on

the PSHELL entry. This

Defines the uniform thickness that will be property is required.

used for each element. This value can be

either a real value or a reference to an

existing field definition. This property

defines the T1, T2, T3, and T4 fields on

the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry and/or the

T field on the PSHELL entry. This

property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any non-isotropic material within the element. There are

three ways to assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate system, which is then

projected onto the element, (2) define a vector that will be projected onto the element, or (3)

define a constant angle offset from the default element coordinate system. This defines the

setting of the THETA or MCID field on the CTRIAR or CQUADR entry. This scalar value can

either be a constant value or a reference to an existing coordinate system. This property is

optional.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

Chapter 2: Building A Model 193

Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an

adaptive, p-element analysis.

Create 2D Membrane P- Formulation Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6, Quad/8, Tri/7,

Quad/9. Tri/9, Quad/12, Tri/13,

Quad/16

Use this form to create a CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 element and a PSHELL property. The appropriate fields

on the PSHELL entry are filled in or left blank in order to achieve the requested behavior. The p-

formulation shell element is supported in MSC. Nastran Version 69 or later. Therefore, the MSC .Nastran

Version in the Translation Parameters form must be set to 69.

194 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Defines the material to be used. A list of all materials currently in the database is displayed

when data is entered. Either select from the list using the mouse or type in the name. This

property defines the setting of the MID1 field on the PSHELL entry. This property is required.

Defines the basic orientation for any Polynomial orders for displacement

non-isotropic material within the representation within elements. Each

element. There are two ways to assign contains a list of three integers referring to

this definition: (1) reference a the directions defined by the P-order

coordinate system, then the projected Coordinate System (default elemental).

x-axis of the coordinate system is the Starting P-orders apply to the first adaptive

material x-axis or (2) define a constant cycle. The adaptive analysis process will

angle offset from the projected x-axis of limit the polynomial orders to the values

basic system. This property defines the specified in Maximum P-orders. These are

setting of the THETA or MCID field on the Polyi fields on the PVAL entry.

the CQUAD4 or CTRIA3 entry. This

property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 195

Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this

coordinate system. By default this system is elemental. This is the

CID field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error

analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle

to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.

Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.

By default this value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the

ADAPT entry.

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate

in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 0.0. This is the

SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate

in the error analysis. By default this value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is

the EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 2D Shear Panel Quad/4

Use this form to create a CSHEAR element and a PSHEAR property. This defines a shear panel element

of the structural model.

196 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from the list using

the mouse or type in the name. This defines the settings of the MID field on

the PSHEAR entry. This property is required.

Defines the uniform thickness, which factor for extensional included in the

will be used for each element. This stiffness along the 1-2 and mass derived from

defines the T field on the PSHEAR 3-4 sides. This is the F1 the material of the

entry. This property is required. This field on the PSHEAR entry. element. This is

value can be either a real value or a This value can be either a defined in mass per

reference to an existing field definition. real value or a reference to unit area of the

an existing field definition. element. This is the

This property is optional. NSM field on the

PSHEAR entry.

Defines the effectiveness factor for extensional This value can be

stiffness along the 2-3 and 1-4 sides. This is the either a real value

F2 field on the PSHEAR entry. This value can be or a reference to an

either a real value or a reference to an existing existing field

field definition. This property is optional. definition. This

property is

optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 197

Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values

Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for

implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not

specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based

on the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or

if the elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the

PSHEARN entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces

the PSHEARN entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces

it not to be written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or

detected, the usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based

on the setting on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining

a Subcase. See Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear

Solution Type, 366.

Solid (CHEXA)

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 3D Solid Homogeneous Standard Tet/4, Wedge/6

only)

P-Formulation Wedge/15,

Hex/20

Hyperelastic

Formulation

Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property or a CHEXA

and a PCOMP property. For Property 3D Solid / Laminate you can now define the Integration Scheme.

Note that only Assumed Strain is allowed for HEX8 elements only when ply stack direction is in Z-

198 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

element diretion and the ply thicknesses have been defined as percent thicknesses. Any other

combination will revert the integration scheme to the Nastran default for linear or quadratic elements.

the database is displayed when data is entered. Either select from

the list using the mouse or type in the name. This property defines

the settings of the MID field on the PSOLID entryor references a

PCOMP entry in the case of Laminated Composites. This

property is required.

referenced nonisotropic Defines the type of

materials and solid element integration network to be

results. This can be set to used. This property is the IN

Global, Elemental, or to a field on the PSOLID entry

specific coordinate frame and can be set to Bubble,

reference and defines the Two, or Three. This property

CORDM field on the PSOLID is optional.

entry. The default is Global.

Nonlinear stresses and strains

are output in the Elemental

system regardless of the

setting. Defines the integration scheme to be used.

This property is the ISOP field on the

PSOLID entry and can be set to Reduced or

Defines where the output for these elements Full. This property is optional.

are to be reported. This property can be set

to either Gauss or Grid and is the STRESS

field on the PSOLID entry. This property is

optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 199

Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values

Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for

implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not

specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on

the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the

elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSLDN1

entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSLDN1

entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be

written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the

usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting on

the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See

Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 366.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for an

adaptive, p-element analysis:

Create 3D Solid P-Formulation Tet/4, Wedge/6

Hex/8, Tet/10

Tet/40, Wedge/24,Wedge/52,

Hex/32, Hex/64

Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PSOLID property.

200 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

representation within elements. Each used. A list of all materials

contains a list of three integers currently in the database is

Defines orientation for referring to the directions defined by displayed when data is

the referenced the P-order Coord. System (default entered. Either select from

material. This elemental). Starting P-orders apply to the list using the mouse or

property can be set to the first adaptive cycle. The adaptive type in the name. This

Global, Elemental or analysis process will limit the property defines the setting

to a user-defined polynomial orders to the values of the MID field on the

coordinate system specified in Maximum P-orders. PSOLID entry. This

and defines the These are the Polyi fields on the property is required.

CORDM field on the PVAL entry.

PSOLID entry. The

default is Global. This

property is optional.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 201

Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the previous page are:

P-order Coord. System The three sets of three integer p-orders above refer to the axes of this

coordinate system. By default, this system is elemental. This is the

CID field on the PVAL entry.

Activate Error Estimate Flag controlling whether this set of elements participates in the error

analysis. This is the ERREST field on the ADAPT entry.

P-order Adaptivity Controls the particular type of p-order adjustment from adaptive cycle

to cycle. This is the TYPE field on the ADAPT entry.

Error Tolerance The tolerance used to determine if the adaptive analysis is complete.

By default the value is equal to 0.1. This is the ERRTOL field on the

ADAPT entry.

Stress Threshold Value Elements with von Mises stress below this value will not participate in

the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 0.0. This is the

SIGTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Strain Threshold Value Elements with von Mises strain below this value will not participate in

the error analysis. By default the value is equal to 1.0E-8. This is the

EPSTOL field on the ADAPT entry.

Integration Network Defines the type of integration network to be used. This property is the

IN field on the PSOLID entry and can be set to Bubble, Two, or Three.

This property is optional.

Integration Scheme Defines where the output for these elements are to be reported. This

can be set to either Gauss or Grid. This property is the STRESS field

on the PSOLID entry. This property is optional.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear

analysis:

Create 2D 2D Solid Plane Strain Tri/3, Quad/4, Tri/6,

Quad/8, Quad/9

Hyperelastic

Formulation

202 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CQUAD, CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CTRIA3, or CTRIA6 element and a PLPLANE

property.

Identification number list of all materials currently in the

of a coordinate database is displayed when data is

Location of stress and strain

system defining the entered. Either select from the list

output. the options are “GAUS”

plane of deformation. using the mouse or type in the

(default) or “GRID.” this defines

This defines the CID name. This property defines the

the STR field on the PLPLANE

field on the PLPLANE setting of the MID field on the

entry.

entry. PLPLANE entry. This property is

required.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear

analysis:

Create 2D 2D Solid Axisymmetric CQUADX,

Hyperelastic CTRIAX

Formulation

Chapter 2: Building A Model 203

Element Properties

Use this form to create a CQUADX or CTRIAX element and a PLPLANE property.

materials currently in the database is

displayed when data is entered. Either select Location of stress and strain output. the

from the list using the mouse or type in the options are “GAUS” (default) or “GRID.” this

name. This property defines the setting of defines the STR field on the PLPLANE entry.

the MID field on the PLPLANE entry. This

property is required.

204 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen. Information on this form is used to create input for a nonlinear

analysis:

Create 3D Solid Hyperelastic HEX, PENT, TET

Formulation

Use this form to create a CHEXA, CTETRA, or CPENTA element and a PLSOLID property.

materials currently in the database is displayed Location of stress and strain output.

when data is entered. Either select from the list the options are “GAUS” (default) or

using the mouse or type in the name. This “GRID.” this defines the STR field

property defines the setting of the MID field on on the PLSOLID entry.

the PLSOLID entry. This property is required.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 205

Element Properties

Additional properties on the form which do not appear on the form above:

Nonlinear Formulation This optional property word can take on any of the three values

Automatic, Large Strain, or Small Strain and is only recognized for

implicit nonlinear (SOL 400) analyses. Automatic is the default if not

specified and determines if large or small strain is appropriate based on

the existence of an elastoplastic material constitutive model and/or if the

elements are contained in a contact body. If appropriate, the PSLDN1

entry is written for this property set. Large Strain forces the PSLDN1

entry to be written, regardless; and Small Strain forces it not to be

written, regardless. In addition, if large strain is forced or detected, the

usage of NLMOPTS, LRGSTRN,0 or 1 is written based on the setting

on the Load Increment Parameters form when defining a Subcase. See

Static Subcase Parameters for Implicit Nonlinear Solution Type, 366.

This subordinate form appears when the Input Properties button is selected on the Element Properties

form and the following options are chosen.

Create 3D Solid Laminate HEX, PENT, TET

Use this form to create CHEXA elements and a PCOMP (SOL 600) or PCOMPLS (SOL400) property.

For Property 3D Solid / Laminate you can now define the Integration Scheme. Note that only Assumed

Strain is allowed for HEX8 elements only when ply stack direction is in Z-element diretion and the ply

thicknesses have been defined as percent thicknesses. Any other combination will revert the integration

scheme to the Nastran default for linear or quadratic elements.

206 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Element Properties

material within the element. There are three ways to

assign this definition: (1) reference a coordinate

Defines the material to be used. A list of all system, which is then projected onto the element, (2)

materials currently in the database is define a vector that will be projected onto the element,

displayed when data is entered. Either or (3) define a constant angle offset from the default

select from the list using the mouse or type element coordinate system. This scalar value can

in the name. This property defines the either be a constant value or a reference to an existing

PCOMP entry to be used. This property is coordinate system. This property is optional.

required.

Note: Only method 3 is supported in this release.

Defines element face used as base ply orientation. For “BEND”, “SMEAR”, “SMCORE” (see MD

[Thickness Direction 3D] Nastran QRG for definitions.

"Nastran Elem X" -- this corresponds to 1-4-8-5

"Nastran Elem Y" -- this corresponds to 2-1-5-6

"Nastran Elem Z" -- this corresponds to 1-2-3-4

Chapter 2: Building A Model 207

Beam Modeling

Modeling structures composed of beams can be more complicated than modeling shell, plate, or solid

structures. First, it is necessary to define bending, extensional, and torsional stiffness that may be

complex functions of the beam cross sectional dimensions. Then it is necessary to define the orientation

of this cross section in space. Finally, if the centroid of the cross section is offset from the two finite

element nodes defining the beam element, these offsets must be explicitly defined. Fortunately, Patran

provides a number of tools to simplify these aspects of modeling.

The cross section properties are defined on the element property forms shown on pages General Section

Beam (CBAR), 93 and Tapered Beam (CBEAM), 110. The properties can be entered directly into the data

boxes labeled Area, Inertia i,j, Torsional Constant, etc. or by pushing the large I-beam icon on these forms

to access the Beam Library form. The Beam Library forms are a much more convenient way of defining

properties for standard cross sections and are shown below.

Create Action

The first step in using the beam library is to select the section icon for the particular cross section desired

(e.g. I-section).Then the dimensions for each of the components of the beam section must be entered.

208 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Beam Modeling

Current

beam

section as

selected

from the

section

library icon

palette. The

required

dimensions

are shown.

Enter the

dimensions

of the beam

section

here,

referring to

the beam

section

icon.

properties to a report file.

based on the current dimensions These forward and backward

and displays an image of the scaled arrows provide access to

section along with the properties. additional beam section icons.

Select the icon representing the

desired section.

List of existing beam sections. This list can be filtered to contain only the section names

of interest using the filter mechanism.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 209

Beam Modeling

Finally, a section name must be entered and the Apply button pushed. The other options available with

the beam library are documented in the Patran Reference Manual, see Beam Library (p. 483) in the Patran

Reference Manual. Once one or more beam sections have been defined, these can be selected in the

section data box on the element properties form.

Supplied Functions

I-Beam - Six dimensions -- lower flange thickness (t1), upper flange thickness

(t2),lower flange width (w1), upper flange width (w2), overall height (H), and web

thickness (t)-- allows for symmetric or unsymmetrical I-beam definition.

Angle - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W),

horizontal flange thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).

Tee - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), horizontal flange

thickness (t1), vertical flange thickness (t2).

Box-Symmetric - Closed section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width

(W), top and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), side flange thicknesses (t2).

Tube - Closed section, two dimensions -- outer radius (R1), inner radius (R2).

Channel - Open section, four dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W), top

and bottom flange thicknesses (t1), shear web thickness (t).

210 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Beam Modeling

Bar - Solid section, two dimensions -- height (H) and width (W).

width (W), top flange thickness (t1), bottom flange thickness (t2), right side flange

thickness (t3), left side flange thickness (t4).

Hat - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), top of hat flange width (W), bottom of hat

flange width for one side (W1), thickness (t).

H-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), width between inner edges of vertical

flanges (W), horizontal shear web thickness (t), and thickness of one vertical flange

(W1/2).

Cross - Four dimensions -- overall height (H), vertical flange thickness (t), horizontal

flange thickness (t2), length of free horizontal flange for one side (W/2).

Z-Beam - Four dimensions -- overall height (H2), height of vertical flange between as

measured between horizontal flanges, length of free horizontal flange for one side (W),

thickness (t1).

Hexagonal - Solid section, three dimensions -- overall height (H), overall width (W),

horizontal distance from side vertex to top or bottom surface vertex along the common

edge (i.e., diagonal edge hypotenuse times the cosine of the exterior diagonal angle).

The Bar Orientation data box on the Input Properties form is used to define how the y-axis of the beam

cross section is oriented in space. By default the Value Type is Vector. This tells MSC Nastran that the

cross section y-axis lies in the plane defined by the beam’s x-axis (the line connecting the two node

points) and this vector. The Value Type pop up menu may be changed to Node ID. In this case the y-axis

lies in the plane defined by the x-axis and the selected node.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 211

Beam Modeling

When the Value Type is Vector and the Bar Orientation data box is selected the following select box

appears on the screen.

These select tools provide different options for defining vectors. They are discussed in

more detail in the Select Menu (p. 35) in the Patran Reference Manual.

These tools

provide different

ways to define

vectors. In

addition, the user

These three tools define the orientation vector is requested to

as the 1 (x), 2(y), or 3(z) axis of a selected select a coordinate

coordinate system. This is a convenient way system in which

to specify the orientation when it is aligned this vector is

with one of the three axes of a rectangular defined.

coordinate system. When the system is not The simplest list

rectangular (e.g. cylindrical) these tools may processor syntax

not provide the desired definition because the that appears in the

defined vector does not change direction at databox for a

different points in space--these tools just vector in an

provide an alternate way to define a global alternate

vector. coordinate system

is <x_component,

y_component,

z_component>

coord cord_id (e.g.

<1, 0, 0> coord 3).

In many cases it is

easy to simply type

a definition in this

form into the Bar

This tool may be used to define a general vector Orientation

with respect to an alternate coordinate system. databox.

When this icon is picked, the select menu changes

to the one on the right.

After the orientation has been defined, there are two ways to verify its correctness in Patran. The first

option is in the Element Properties application. By selecting the Show Action, the Definition of X Y

Plane property, and Display Method Vector Plot, the vectors defining the orientation will be shown on

the model. A second option can be used when the Beam Library has been used to define the beam cross

section. There is an option on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 393) in the

Patran Reference Manual called Beam Display. The menu allows different display options for displaying

an outline of the defined cross section on the model in the correct location and orientation.

Users should be aware of one difference between the Patran and MD Nastran definitions for cross section

orientation. In Patran the orientation is completely independent of the analysis coordinate system at the

beam nodes. In MD Nastran, the orientation vector is assumed to be defined in the same system as the

analysis system at the first node of the beam. In Patran it is perfectly permissible to define the orientation

in a different coordinate system from that analysis system. When the NASTRAN input file is generated,

the necessary transformation of this vector to the analysis system at node 1 will be performed.

212 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Beam Modeling

Two data boxes are provided on the Element Properties, Input Properties form to optionally define an

offset from either node 1 to the cross section centroid (Offset @ Node 1) or from node 2 to the cross

section centroid (Offset @ Node 2). The same select menu tools are available for defining these vectors.

One difference between the orientation definition and the offset definitions, however, is that for the offset

the magnitude of the vector is important. Because of this, the select menu tools are usually not very

convenient. Typically, offsets are defined by typing the definition (e.g <x, y, z> or <x, y, z> coord n>)

into the appropriate data box.

Two options are available for verifying the definitions of offsets; these options are very similar to those

for orientations. The Element Properties, Show Action will allow the end offsets to be displayed as

vectors on the model. This option is not especially useful because the vector plot shows only the direction

of the offset, not the magnitude of the offset. It is usually much more useful to view the Beam Display

menu on the Display form Display>LBC/Element Property Attributes (p. 393) in the Patran Reference

Manual to select the display option with offsets. The viewport will then show the beam displayed in both

the offset and non-offset positions.

Figure 2-1 shows a simple example of a circular cylinder stiffened with Z-stiffeners. The cross section

was defined by selecting the Beam Library icon on the Element Properties/Input Properties form. The Z

cross section was selected on the Beam Library form, the cross section dimensions input, a section name

input, and the Apply button pushed. On the Input Properties form, the Use Beam Section toggle is set to

ON. The defined section name is selected in the [Section Name] data box. The string <-1.0 0. 0.> coord

1 is typed into the Bar Orientation data box to align the cross section orientation with the radial direction

of the global, cylindrical system. Similarly, the strings <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1 and <-2.0 0.0 0.0> coord 1

Chapter 2: Building A Model 213

Beam Modeling

typed into the Offset @ Node 1 and Offset @ Node 2 data boxes define the end offsets to be radially

inward.

R

Z1

X

Z

214 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

The Loads and Boundary Conditions form will appear when the Loads/BCs toggle, located on the Patran

main form, is chosen. When creating a load and boundary condition there are several option menus. The

selections made on the Loads and Boundary Conditions menu will determine which load and boundary

conditions form appears, and ultimately, which MD Nastran loads and boundary conditions will be

created.

The following pages give an introduction to the Loads and Boundary Conditions form and details of all

the loads and boundary conditions supported by the Patran MD Nastran Analysts Preference.

This form appears when Loads/BCs is selected on the main menu. The Loads and Boundary Conditions

form is used to provide options to create the various MD Nastran loads and boundary conditions. For a

definition of full functionality, see Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 23) in the Patran Reference

Manual. Options for defining slide line contact are also accessed from this main Loads and Boundary

Conditions form. For more information see Defining Contact Regions, 237.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 215

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Defines the general load type to be applied. Object choices are Displacement, Force,

Pressure, Temperature, Inertial Load, Initial Displacement, Initial Velocity, Velocity,

Acceleration, Distributed Load, CID Distributed Load, Total Load, Contact, Initial

Temperature, Planar Rigid Wall and Init.Rotation Field.

The available options depend on the selected

Object. The general selections can be Nodal,

Element Uniform, or Element Variable. Nodal

is applied explicitly to nodes. Element Uniform

defines a constant value to be applied over an

entire element, element face, or element edge.

Element Variable defines a value that varies

across an entire element, element face, or

element edge.

Case menu. When the Load Cases toggle

located on the main menu is chosen, the

Load Cases menu will appear. Under Load

Case Type, select either Static or Time

Dependent, then enter the name of the

case, and click on the Apply button.

Dependent, 219 Input Data form, depending on

the current Load Case Type.

216 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

The following table outlines the options when Create is the selected Action.

Object Type

• Displacement • Nodal

• Element Uniform

• Element Variable

• Force • Nodal

• Pressure • Element Uniform

• Element Variable

• Temperature • Nodal

• Element Uniform

• Element Variable

• Inertial Load • Element Uniform

• Initial Displacement • Nodal

• Initial Velocity • Nodal

• Velocity • Nodal

• Acceleration • Nodal

• Distributed Load • Element Uniform

• Element Variable

• CID Distributed Load • Element Uniform

• Element Variable

• Total Load • Element Uniform

• Contact • Element Uniform

• Initial Plastic Strain • Element Uniform

• Initial Stress • Element Uniform

• Initial Temperature • Nodal

• Planar Rigid Wall * • Nodal

• Init. Rotation Field * • Nodal

Static

This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary

Conditions form and the Current Load Case Type is Static. The Current Load Case Type is set on the Load

Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 214. The information on the

Chapter 2: Building A Model 217

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Data form will vary depending on the selected Object. Defined below is the standard information

found on this form.

218 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

values defined on this form. The

default value is 1.0. Primarily used

when field definitions are used to

define the load values.

See Object Tables, 221 for detailed

information.

Input Data entries, spatial fields can

be referenced. All defined spatial fields

currently in the database are listed. If

the input focus is placed in the Input

Data entry and a spatial field is

selected by clicking in this list, a

reference to that field will be entered in

the Input Data entry.

Fields input form to allow field creation

and modification within the loads/bcs

application. Visible only when focus is set

in a databox which can have a DFEM

field reference.

data defined on this form. This only appears on the form for Nodal

type loads. This can be a reference to any existing coordinate frame

definition.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 219

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Time Dependent

This subordinate form appears when the Input Data button is selected on the Loads and Boundary

Condition form and the Current Load Case Type is Time Dependent. The Current Load Case Type is set

on the Load Case form. For more information see Loads & Boundary Conditions Form, 214 and Load

Cases, 236. The information on the Input Data form will vary, depending on the selected Object. Defined

below is the standard information found on this form.

220 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

factor for all values defined

Load/BC Set Scale Factor on this form.The default

value is 1.0. Primarily used

1 when field definitions are

used to define the load

Spatial Dependence * Time Dependence values.

Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) will vary. See Object

Tables, 221 for detailed

information.

Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3)

dependent values in the

Input Data entries, time-

dependent fields can be

Spatial Fields Time Dependent Fields referenced. All defined time-

dependent fields currently in

the database are listed. If the

input focus is placed in the

Input Data entry and a time-

dependent field is selected

by clicking in this list, a

reference to that field will be

FEM Dependent Data... entered in the Input Data

entry.

Coord 0

Defines the coordinate frame

to be used to interpret the

degree-of-freedom data

OK Reset defined on this form. This only

appears on the form for Nodal

type loads. This can be a

reference to any existing

This button will display a Discrete FEM Fields input form to allow field creation coordinate frame definition.

and modification within the loads/bcs application. Visible only when focus is set

in a databox which can have a DFEM field reference.

When specifying real values in the Input Data entries, spatial fields can be referenced. All

defined spatial fields currently in the database are listed. If the input focus is placed in the Input

Data entry and a spatial field is selected by clicking in this list, a reference to that field will be

entered in the Input Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 221

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Object Tables

These are areas on the static and transient input data forms where the load data values are defined. The

data fields that appear depend on the selected load Object and Type. In some cases, the data fields also

depend on the selected Target Element Type. The following Object Tables outline and define the various

input data that pertains to a specific selected object:

Object Type Analysis Type Option

Displacement Nodal Structural Standard

Velocity

Acceleration

Creates MD Nastran SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data for Displacement entries. All non blank entries will

cause an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also be created

to define the non zero enforced displacement or rotation. Phase angle specifications will create DPHASE

entries for all corresponding non blank translational or rotational data in frequency response analysis.

Displacement, Velocity and Acceleration LBCs used in frequency response / dynamic analysis also

define the RLOAD1 entries with DISP, VELOC, and ACCEL keywords, respectively. For frequency

response analysis, the LBCs must reference a frequency range of interest defined as a non-spatial

frequency field such that a TABLEDi entry is created. The load case needs to be defined as

Time/Frequency dependent to do this. Values given via this option are total enforced values. For relative

enforced values used in SOL 400, see the description for the Relative Displacement option below.

Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the total enforced translational values. These are in model

length units.

Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the total enforced rotational values. These are in radians.

Translational Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency

(Tth1,Tth2,Tth3) response analysis for the translational values. These are in degrees.

Rotational Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency

(Rth1,Rth2,Rth3) response analysis for the rotational values. These are in degrees.

Displacement Element Uniform Structural 3D

Element Variable

Applies a zero or nonzero total displacement boundary condition to the face of solid elements. The

primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to p-elements; but it may also be used for

standard solid elements. If applied to a p-element solid, the appropriate FEFACE and GMBC entries are

created. If applied to a standard solid element, the appropriate SPC1 and SPCD entries are created. In

222 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

frequency response analysis, the phase angles are written as DPHASE entries. See comments above for

nodal displacements.

Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These values

are in model-length units.

Translation Phases Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency response

(Tth1,Tth2,Tth3) analysis for the translational displacement values. These are in degrees.

Displacement Nodal Structural Relative Displacement

Applies a zero or nonzero relative displacement boundary condition as opposed to a total magnitude. This

is used in SOL 400 only with multiple steps and not applicable to other solution sequences. This LBC

will be ignored if present in a referenced load case for solution sequences other than SOL 400. The

appropriate SPC1 and SPCR entries are created. For example, if a DOF is specified on a SPCR with 0.0

for step 2, the relative displacement of this DOF for step 2 with respective to step 1 is 0.0. The total

displacement of step 2 is 0.2 if the solution of step 1 for this DOF is 0.2.

Relative Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the relative enforced translational displacement values

in vector form, each value separated by a comma between the

brackets <>. If no enforced translation is to be specified, the

particular component should be left blank.

Relative Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defined the relative enforced rotational displacement values in

vector form, each value separated by a comma between the

brackets <>. If no enforced rotation is to be specified, the

particular component should be left blank.

Force

Object Type Analysis Type

Force Nodal Structural

Creates MD Nastran FORCE and MOMENT Bulk Data entries. Creates the DPHASE entries in

frequency response analysis when specifying phase angles for out-of-phase loading. RLOAD1 entries are

created for dynamic analysis and reference the appropriate FORCE entries. For frequency response

analysis, the force LBCs must reference a frequency range of interest defined as a non-spatial frequency

field such that a TABLEDi entry is created. The load case needs to be defined as Time/Frequency

dependent to do this.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 223

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Force (F1,F2,F3) Defines the applied forces in the translation degrees of freedom. This

defines the N vector and the F magnitude on the FORCE entry.

Moment (M1,M2,M3) Defines the applied moments in the rotational degrees of freedom. This

defines the N vector and the M magnitude on the MOMENT entry.

Force Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency

(Fth1,Fth2,Fth3) response analysis for the corresponding force components. These are

in degrees.

Moment Phase Angles Defines the phase angle for out-of-phase loading in frequency

(Mth1,Mth2,Mth3) response analysis for the corresponding moment components. These

are in degrees.

Pressure

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension

Pressure Element Uniform Structural 2D

Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4

entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values.

These values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform

pressure field across that face.

Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a

PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These

values are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure

field across that face.

Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through

P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined

as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit

length (i.e. independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent nodal

loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated

at the middle of the application region.

Pressure Element Uniform Structural 3D

224 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry.

This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it

will be evaluated once at the center of the applied region.

Pressure Element Variable Structural 2D

Top Surf Pressure Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4

entry. The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If

a scalar field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1

through P4 values.

Bot Surf Pressure Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a

PLOAD4 entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a scalar

field is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4

values.

Edge Pressure For Axisymmetric Solid elements (CTRIAX6), defines the P1 through

P3 values on the PLOADX1 entry where THETA on that entry is defined

as zero. For other 2D elements, this will be interpreted as a load per unit

length (e.g., independent of thickness) and converted into equivalent

nodal loads (FORCE entries). If a scalar field is referenced, it will be

evaluated independently at each node.

Pressure Element Variable Structural 3D

Chapter 2: Building A Model 225

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Pressure Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry.

This defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced,

it will be evaluated separately for each of the P1 through P4 values.

Temperature

Object Type Analysis Type

Temperature Nodal Structural

Temperature Defines the T fields on the TEMP entry.

Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D

Writes the TEMPP1 entry. For 2D Target Elements, T1/T2 or TBAR/TPRIME are written to the

TEMPP1 entry but not both. For Equivalent Section shell properties or shell properties that have Z1/Z2

defined, T1/T2 is written and TBAR/TPRIME left blank on the TEMPP1 entry. Nastran determines the

correct TPRIME. For all other shell properties TBAR/TPRIME are written and T1/T2 left blank.

TBAR/TPRIME are computed by Patran from T1/T2 using the thickness property value. This is for

Element Variable Temperature LBCs. For Element Uniform Temperature LBC, only TBAR is written or

necessary. All others fields are left blank.

Creates MD Nastran TEMPRB Bulk Data entries.

Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPRB entry. The

temperature value is used for both the TA and TB fields. The T1a, T1b,

T2a, and T2b fields are all defined as 0.0.

226 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Temperature Element Uniform Structural 2D

Temperature Defines a uniform temperature field using a TEMPP1 entry. The

temperature value is used for the T field. The gradient through the thickness

is defined to be 0.0.

Temperature Element Variable Structural 1D

Centroid Temp Defines a variable temperature file using a TEMPRB entry. A field

reference will be evaluated at either end of the element to define the TA

and TB fields.

Axis-1 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 1 direction. A field reference will

be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T1a and T1b fields.

Axis-2 Gradient Defines the temperature gradient in the 2 direction. A field reference will

be evaluated at either end of the element to define the T2a and T2b fields.

Temperature Element Variable Structural 2D

Chapter 2: Building A Model 227

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Top Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The top

and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values

on the TEMPP1 entry.

Bot Surf Temp Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element. The

top and bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient

values on the TEMPP1 entry.

Temperature Element Uniform Structural 1D, 2D, 3D

Element Variable

This option applies only to the P-formulation elements. A TEMPF and DEQATN entry are created for

the constant temperature case. A TEMPF and TABLE3D entry are created for the case when a spatial

field is referenced. Writes the TEMPP1 entry. For 2D Target Elements, T1/T2 or TBAR/TPRIME are

written to the TEMPP1 entry but not both. For Equivalent Section shell properties or shell properties that

have Z1/Z2 defined, T1/T2 is written and TBAR/TPRIME left blank on the TEMPP1 entry. Nastran

determines the correct TPRIME. For all other shell properties TBAR/TPRIME are written and T1/T2 left

blank. TBAR/TPRIME are computed by Patran from T1/T2 using the thickness property value. This is

for Element Variable Temperature LBCs. For Element Uniform Temperature LBC, only TBAR is written

or necessary. All others fields are left blank.

Temperature Defines the temperature or temperature distribution in the element.

Inertial Load

Object Type Analysis Type

Inertial Load Element Uniform Structural

Trans Accel (A1,A2,A3) Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRAV entry.

Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.

Rot Accel (a1,a2,a3) Defines the R vector and the RACC magnitude value on the RFORCE

entry.

The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis coordinate frame. The

origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. Note that rotational velocity

and rotational acceleration cannot be defined together in the same set.In generating the GRAV and

228 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

RFORCE entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for each Patran

load set.

Initial Displacement

Object Type Analysis Type

Initial Displacement Nodal Structural

Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the U0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC

entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.

Rotations (R1,R2,R3) Defines the U0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry.

A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.

Initial Velocity

Object Type Analysis Type

Initial Velocity Nodal Structural

Trans Veloc (v1,v2,v3) Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC

entry. A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.

Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry.

A unique TIC entry will be created for each non blank entry.

Distributed Load

Object Type Analysis Type Dimension

Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 1D

Element Variable

Defines distributed force or moment loading along beam elements using MD Nastran PLOAD1 entries.

The coordinate system in which the load is applied is defined by the beam axis and the Bar Orientation

element property. The Bar Orientation must be defined before this Distributed Load can be created. If the

Bar Orientation is subsequently changed, the Distributed Load must be updated manually if necessary.

For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a linear load

variation.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 229

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Edge Distributed Load Defines the FXE, FYE, and FZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.

(f1,f2,f3)

Edge Distributed Moment Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three PLOAD1 entries.

(m1,m2,m3)

Distributed Load Element Uniform Structural 2D

Element Variable

Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2D elements. The coordinate system for

the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction is along the edge. Positive

x is determined by the element corner node connectivity. See Patran Element Library (p. 345) in the

Reference Manual - Part III. For example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2,

3, 4. The positive x directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z

direction is normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y

direction is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes and always

points into the element. The MD Nastran entries generated, depend on the element type.

For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at all element nodes lying on the edge.

Edge Distributed Load For axisymmetric solid elements (CTRIAX6), the PA, PB, and

(f1,f2,f3) THETA fields on the PLOADX1 entry are defined. For other 2D

elements, the input vector is interpreted as load per unit length and

converted into equivalent nodal loads (FORCE entries).

Edge Distributed Moment For 2D shell elements, the input vector is interpreted as moment per

(m1,m2,m3) unit length and converted into equivalent nodal moments (MOMENT

entries).

Contact

Object Type Analysis Type

Contact Element Uniform Structural

This form is used to define certain data for the MD Nastran Input entries. Other data entries are defined

under the Analysis Application when setting up a job for nonlinear static or nonlinear transient dynamic

analysis. A contact table is also supported; by default, all contact bodies initially have the potential to

interact with all other contact bodies and themselves. This default behavior can be modified under the

Contact Table form, located on the Solution Parameters subform in the Analysis Application when

creating a Load Step.

230 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

After defining the Input Properties you can use the Preview Rigid Body Motion to check the movement

of the rigid bodies in place. This is an effective tool for verifying the directions for LBCs.

Input Description

Penetration Type If the Penetration Type is One Sided, nodes in the Slave Region are not

allowed to penetrate the segments of the Master Region. If Symmetric, in

addition, nodes in the Master Region are not allowed to penetrate segments

of the Slave Region.

Static Friction Coefficient of static friction between the two surfaces.

Coefficient (MU1)

Stiffness in Stick FSTIF is a penalty parameter in the contact formulation. The default value

(FSTIF) is usually adequate.

Penalty Stiffness SFAC is a penalty parameter in the contact formulation. The default value

Scaling Factor (SFAC) is usually adequate.

Slideline Width (W1) Slideline Width is constant along the slideline and is used to determine the

area for contact stress calculation. This is the Wi field on the BFRIC entry.

Vector Pointing from A vector must be defined which lies in the contact plane and points from the

Master to Slave Surface Master region to the Slave region. This vector is used to define the

coordinate system on the BCONP entry and the BLSEG entries for each

region.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 231

Loads and Boundary Conditions

.

Description

Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between two

Coefficient (MU) bodies with different friction coefficients, the average value is used.

Define (type of contact) Select 1) Analytic Contact, 2) Contact Area, 3) Exclusion Region, or 4) Glue

Deactivation. The Contact Area and Exclusion Region are defined using MD

Nastran entry BCHANGE in the .bdf file, with NODE for Contact Area, and

EXCLUDE for Exclusion Region. The Glue Deactivation is defined using

MD Nastran entry UNGLUE.

Boundary Type Select either 1) Analytic, or 2) Discrete. By default, a deformable contact

body boundary is defined by the free faces of its elements; this is used by the

Discrete option. However, instead of using the free faces of the elements

(Discrete), it is possible to use spline surfaces (2D) to represent the outer

faces (element faces) of the contact bodies; this is used by the Analytic

option. The Analytic option can improve the accuracy of deformable-

deformable contact analysis.

C0 Continuity Using this, enforces C0-continuity at edges where the normal vector to the

outer contour of the structure indicates a discontinuity. This is enabled for 3D

analysis only.

Auto Detect Select this to cause the automatic detection of any discontinuity.

Discontinuities

Feature Angle If the angle between the normals of two touching (adjacent) segments of

contact bodies is greater than the Feature Angle, there is a discontinuity there,

and the discontinuity (at edge) is preserved.

MFD Increment The MFD file contains the spline surfaces that were created to represent some

or all of the outer faces of the contact model. Using this causes the spline

surfaces to be written to an MFD file every nth increment. This file is an

Patran database, and can be opened with Patran, and the spline surfaces can

be compared with the contact model.

Select See Select Deactivation Region, 232

Discontinuities...

Edge Contact... See Edge Contact Subform, 232

Select Contact Area... See Select Contact Area, 232

Select Exclusion See Select Exclusion Region, 232

Region...

Select Deactivation See Select Deactivation Region, 232

Region...

232 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Description

Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define any discontinuities.

Detect Discontinuities Click on this button to determine if there are any discontinuities for the

entities that define the Application Region.

Define Discontinuities Select entities to define the discontinuities.

.

Description

Include Outside (Solid When detecting contact of solid elements (for example, CHEXA elements)

Element) use this to include contact of the outside of the elements. For details refer to

the BCBODY entry (defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D)

of the MD Nastran QRG. The entry that is used for the BCBODY entry is

COPTB (flag that indicates how body surfaces may contact).

Check Layers (Shell For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu chooses

Element) the layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only,

Bottom Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the

appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.

Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore

Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the

2nd data block.

Include Edges (Edges) Use this to specify how body surfaces may contact. There are three options,

Beam/Bar, Free and Hard Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCBODY

entry (defines a flexible or rigid contact body in 2D or 3D) of the MD

Nastran QRG. The entry that is used for the BCBODY entry is COPTB (flag

that indicates how body surfaces may contact).

.

Description

Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the contact area.

Define Contact Area Select entities to define the contact area.

.

Description

Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the exclusion region.

Define Exclusion Select entities to define the exclusion region.

Region

Chapter 2: Building A Model 233

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Description

Select (entity type) Choose to either select Geometry or FEM to define the glue deactivation

region.

Define Deactivated Select entities to define the entities that are to be un-glued.

Entities

The input data form differs for 1D and 2D rigid bodies. One dimensional rigid surfaces are defined as

beam elements, or as curves (which may optionally be meshed with beam elements prior to translation)

and used in 2D problems. Two dimensional rigid surfaces must be defined as Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements,

or as surfaces (which may optionally be meshed with Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements prior to translation) and

are used in 3D problems. The elements will be translated as 4-node patches if meshed or as NURB

surfaces if not meshed.

234 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Input Description

Flip Contact Side Upon defining each rigid body, MSC.Patran displays normal vectors or tic

marks. These should point inward to the rigid body. In other words, the side

opposite the side with the vectors is the side of contact. Generally, the vector

points away from the body in which it wants to contact. If it does not point

inward, then use the modify option to turn this toggle ON. The direction of the

inward normal will be reversed.

Symmetry Plane This specifies that the surface or body is a symmetry plane. It is OFF by

default.

Null Initial Motion This toggle is enabled only for Velocity and Position type of Motion Control.

If it is ON, the initial velocity, position, and angular velocity/rotation are set to

zero in the CONTACT option regardless of their settings here (for increment

zero).

Motion Motion of rigid bodies can be controlled in a number of different ways:

Control velocity, position (displacement), or forces/moments.

Velocity For velocity controlled rigid bodies, define the X and Y velocity components

(vector) for 2D problems or X, Y, and Z for 3D problems.

Angular For velocity controlled rigid bodies, if the rigid body rotates, give its angular

Velocity (rad/time) velocity in radians per time (seconds usually) about the center of rotation

(global Z axis for 2D problems) or axis of rotation (for 3D problems).

Friction Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between two

Coefficient (MU) bodies with different friction coefficients the average value is used.

Rotation This is a point or node that defines the center of rotation of the rigid body. If

Reference Point left blank the rotation reference point will default to the origin.

Axis of For 2D rigid surfaces in a 3D problem, aside from the rotation reference point,

Rotation if you wish to define rotation you must also specify the axis in the form of a

vector.

First Control Node This is for Force or SPCD controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the

force or SPCD is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the force, but

the application node must also be specified here. If both force and moment are

specified, they must use different control nodes even if they are coincident. If

only 1 control node is specified the rigid body will not be allowed to rotate.

Second Control This is for Moment controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the moment

Node is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the moment, but the application

node must also be specified here. It also acts as the rotation reference point. If

both force and moment are specified, they must use different control nodes

even if they are coincident.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 235

Loads and Boundary Conditions

Planar Rigid Wall Nodal Explicit Nonlinear

1. Kinematic rigid wall without friction

2. Penalty method based rigid wall with friction

These are seen as options at the top of the Input Data form. The user must select which wall will be used.

Both wall’s position and orientation are defined by selecting a coordinate system which has its origin on

the plane and the local z axis as the outward normal from the contact surface. This defines a WALL Bulk

Data entry. There are only parameters associated with the penalty based planar rigid wall.

Static Friction Coefficient Static coefficient of friction.

Kinetic Friction Coefficient Kinetic coefficient of friction.

Exponential Decay Coefficient Exponential decay coefficient EXP.

Object Type Analysis Type

Init. Rotation Field Nodal Explicit Nonlinear

Defines a velocity field of grid points consisting of a rotation and a traslation specification.

Creates a TIC3 Bulk Data entry.

Trans Veloc(v1,v2,v3) Defines the initial translational velocity values. These are in model

length units per unit time.

Rot Veloc (w1,w2,w3) Defines the initial rotational velocity values. These are in degrees per

unit time.

Rotation Center Defines a point at the center of rotation.

236 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Load Cases

Load cases in Patran are used to group a series of load sets into one load environment for the model. Load

cases are selected when defining an analysis job. The usage within MD Nastran is similar. The individual

load sets are translated into MD Nastran load sets, and the load cases are used to create the SUBCASE

commands in the Case Control Section.

For information on how to define multiple static and/or transient load cases, see Load Cases Application

(Ch. 5) in the Patran Reference Manual.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 237

Defining Contact Regions

The MD Nastran preference supports 3D slideline contact functionality introduced in MSC.Nastran

Version 68. This capability allows the user to model contact between 2D and 3D structural regions or

rigid bodies.

This functionality can be accessed by using in the Loads/BCs Application in Patran. After selecting the

Contact Object on the main form, the first step is to define the regions that may come into contact.

Pushing the Application Region button brings up the following form

238 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Defining Contact Regions

Application Region

One or more curves, surface edges, or solid

Geometry Filter edges are defined for the Master and Slave

application regions. The application region

u Geometry can only contain geometric entities. To

model contact between FEM entities without

associated geometry, curves must first be

created from the nodes using the tools

available in the Geometry application.

Master Surface: Slide Line

Active Region: Master Master and Slave regions. The Master

and Slave application regions can be

defined in either order.

Select Curves

Select the curve or edge.

Add Remove

Adds the entities in the Select

Master Region Curves databox to either the Master

Region or Slave Region depending

on the setting of the Active Region

option menu.

Slave Region

OK Clear

Chapter 2: Building A Model 239

Defining Contact Regions

Contact

The second step is to define a set of properties of these contacting surfaces. This is done by pushing the

Input Data button on the main Application form to bring up the following subordinate form.

If the Penetration Type is

One Sided, nodes in the

Input Data Slave Region are not

allowed to penetrate the

Penetration Type: One Sided segments of the Master

Region. If Two Sided, in

addition, nodes in the

Friction Coefficient (MU1) Master Region are not

allowed to penetrate

segments of the Slave

Region. This is the PTYPE

field on the BCONP entry.

Stiffness in Stick (FSTIF)

Coefficient of static friction

between the two surfaces.

This is the MU1 field on

Penalty Stiffness Scaling Factor (SFAC) the BFRIC entry.

FSTIF on the BFRIC entry

1.0 and SFAC on the BCONP

entry are penalty

parameters in the contact

Slideline Width (W1) formulation. The default

values are usually

adequate.

along the slideline and is

used to determine the area

for contact stress

calculation. This is the Wi

field on the BFRIC entry.

A Vector Pointing from Master to Slave Surface

A vector must be defined

which lies in the contact

plane and points from

the Master region to the

Slave region. This vector

is used to define the

OK Reset coordinate system on

the BCONP entry and

the BLSEG entries for

each region.

240 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Rotor Dynamics

The MD Nastran Preference supports steady state and transient rotor dynamics, introduced in

MSC.Nastran 2004. This capability allows you to model structures with rotating parts, allowing for

gyroscopic effects to be included.

Rotor Dynamics are modelled using Rotor and Unbalance entities, created within the Rotor Dynamics...

selection under the Tools menu:

Chapter 2: Building A Model 241

Rotor Dynamics

The Rotor Dynamics form is accessed from the Rotor Dynamics... selection under the Tools menu. This

form is used to create, modify, delete, or show Rotors, which define spin properties, including the axis of

rotation, spin direction, damping factor, and speed.

Create

Modify

Delete

Show

Steady State

Transient

Rotor

Unbalance (Transient only)

model (spin axis). These are the grids in the MD

Nastran ROTORG Bulk Data entry.

These are the GRIDA and GRIDB fields in

the MD Nastran RSPINR and RSPINT Bulk

Data entries. These nodes must be

included in the “Rotor Node List” above.

This is the GR field of the MD Nastran

RSPINR and RSPINT Bulk Data entries.

Spin History (Transient)

242 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Rotor Dynamics

For Steady State analyses, the Spin Profile form is used to define the relative spin rates.

revolutions per minute, or Cycles/Time for

frequency. This value defines the SPDUNIT

field of the MD Nastran RSPINR Bulk Data

entry, and are translated to either ‘RPM’ or

‘FREQ’.

List of relative spin rates. Entries must be in

ascending or descending order. At least one

entry required (no default). These values make

up the SPEEDi fields of the MD Nastran

RSPINR Bulk Data entry.

For Transient analyses, the Spin History form is used to define the spin rates.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 243

Rotor Dynamics

revolutions per minute, or Cycles/Time for

frequency. This value defines the SPDUNIT

field of the MD Nastran RSPINT Bulk Data

entry, and are translated to either ‘RPM’ or

‘FREQ’.

Dependent Field.

rate as a function of time. This field, with the

Speed Amplitude applied to it, will be

translated into an MD Nastran TABLED1 Bulk

Data entry that is referenced by the RSPINT

entry.

Unbalance Form

The Rotor Dynamics Unbalance form is used to create, modify, delete, or show Unbalances, which define

unbalance loads for transient analyses in terms of cylindrical system with the rotor axis as the Z axis.

244 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Rotor Dynamics

Create

Modify

Delete

Show

be included in a transient rotor. When a transient

rotor is selected, the “Node” listbox is populated

with nodes from that rotor’s axis. The unbalance

node may then be selected from that list,

assuring that it belongs to an existing transient

rotor.

This node defines the GRID field of the MD

Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

define the remaining parameters for the MD

Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 245

Rotor Dynamics

The Unbalance Properties Form is used to define the remaining parameters for the Unbalance.

246 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Rotor Dynamics

fields of the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data

entry.

For each of these values, either a constant real

value may be specified, or a time dependent field

my be selected from the list below. Time

dependent fields are translated to TABLED1

entries, and referenced by integer ID values in

the appropriate UNBALNC fields.

Defaults are 1.0 for Radial Offset and 0.0 for Z

Offset. There is no default for Mass.

the unbalance coordinate system (default 0.0).

This defines the THETA field of the MD

Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

unbalance load. The default start time is 0.0,

while the default termination time is 999999.0.

These values define the Ton and Toff fields of

the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

will be used to modify the total mass in the

transient response calculations, 2) the effect of

the rotor spin rate change will be included in

the transient response calculation, or 3) both.

Possible values are None, Mass, Speed, or

Both (default None).

This value defines the CFLAG field of the MD

Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

relative to the ACID of the unbalance node (no

default).

This vector defines the X1, X2, and X3 fields of

the MD Nastran UNBALNC Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 2: Building A Model 247

Rotor Dynamics

248 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Rotor Dynamics

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis

Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Running an Analysis

3

Review of the Analysis Form 250

Translation Parameters 255

Solution Types 261

Direct Text Input 266

Solution Parameters 267

Select Superelements 342

Subcases 344

Subcase Parameters 347

Output Requests 405

Select Superelements 342

Select Explicit MPCs... 433

Non-Structural Mass Properties 434

Select NSM Properties... 439

Subcase Select 441

Restart Parameters 444

Optimize 450

Toptomize 452

Interactive Analysis 460

250 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Review of the Analysis Form

The Analysis form appears when the Analysis toggle, located on the Patran mainform, is chosen. To run

an analysis, or to create a NASTRAN input file, select Analyze as the Action on the Analysis form. Other

forms brought up by the Analysis form are used to define translation parameters, solution type, solution

parameters, output requests, and the load cases. These forms are described on the following pages. For

further information see The Analysis Form (p. 8) in the MSC.Patran Reference Manual.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 251

Review of the Analysis Form

Analysis Form

This form appears when the Analysis toggle is chosen on the main menu. When preparing for an analysis

run, select Analyze as the Action.

Optimize or Toptomize

Access Results

Read Input File

Delete

Monitor (if Patran Analysis Manager is installed).

Abort (if Patran Analysis Manager is installed).

defined in the Preferences>Analysis (p. 439) in the Patran

Reference Manual.

the name will appear in the Job Name list box and all

parameters for this job will be retrieved from the database.

An existing job can be submitted again by simply selecting it

and pushing Apply. It is often convenient to select an existing

job, modify a few parameters and push Apply to submit the

new job.

Name of job. This name will be used as the base file name

for all resulting MD Nastran files and message files.

Nastran executive control section.

parameters not directly related to the solution. These are

primarily used by the Application Preferences during the

forward translation.

analysis to run.

Opens the Direct Text Input form which allows you to directly

enter data for the BULK DATA, Case Control, Executive

Control and File Management sections of the NASTRAN

input file.

Opens the Select Superelements form which allows you to

select the superelements active for the specified job.

be included in this analysis run. The list of selected load

cases is order dependent.

subcases associated with an analysis job.

252 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Review of the Analysis Form

The following table outlines the selections for the Analyze action.

Object Method

Entire Model Full Run

Check Run

Analysis Deck

Model Only

Load SimXpert

Selected Group Full Run

Check Run

Analysis Deck

Model Only

Load SimXpert

Existing Deck Full Run

Load SimXpert

Restart Full Run

Check Run

Analysis Deck

Interactive Full Run

The Object indicates which part of the model is to be analyzed. There are four choices: Entire Model,

Current Group, Existing Deck, and Restart.

• Entire Model is the selected Object if the whole model is to be analyzed.

• Selected Group is for specifying the group that contains the model that is to be analyzed. Select

the button Select Group..., under Existing Groups select the desired group, then select Cancel.

The name of the selected group will appear in the Analysis form under Group: . For more

information see The Group Menu (p. 270) in the Patran Reference Manual.

• Existing Deck is selected if you wish to simply submit an existing input file to MD Nastran.

The jobname appearing in the Job Name listbox is appended with the suffix “.bdf” to form the

input filename. This file must reside in the current directory.

You may also use Existing Deck to directly edit the MD Nastran Bulk Data file.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 253

Review of the Analysis Form

• Restart is selected if you wish to restart an analysis. Currently, restarts are only supported for

the Linear Static (101), Nonlinear Static (106), and Normal Modes (103) solution types. The

Restart Parameters, 444 form allows you to specify where to resume the analysis.

• Interactive analysis utilizes the Patran Preference for MD Nastran capability for performing

visual interactive modal frequency response analysis. The process begins by creating a modal

analysis solution using MD Nastran. The interactive modal frequency response analysis is then

performed using Patran Analysis: Analyze / Interactive / Full Run. The chain that is followed is

1) using Select Nastran .MASTER... select a .DBALL file, 2) using Create Loading... specify the

loading (for example, Acoustic, Force), 3) using Output Requests... specify the desired output,

and 4) using View Results... view the results.

The Method indicates how far the translation is to be taken.The methods are listed below:

• Full Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input file

is submitted to MD Nastran for complete analysis.

• Check Run is the selected type if an Analysis Deck translation is done, and the resulting input

file is submitted to MD Nastran for a check run only.

• Analysis Deck is the selected type if the Model Deck translation is done, plus all load case,

analysis type and analysis parameter data are translated. A complete input file, ready for MD

Nastran should be generated.

• Model Only is the selected type if a Bulk Data file is created that contains only the model data

including node, element, coordinate frame, element property, material property, and loads and

boundary condition data. The translation stops at that point.

• Load SimXpert will lauch SimXpert and automatically transfer the finite element model. The

environment variable MSC_SX_HOME must be set to a valid local installation directory of

SimXpert for this capability to be available.

To submit a single load case, linear static analysis job to MD Nastran it is necessary only to click the

Apply button on the main Analysis form. Appropriate defaults and selections will be made automatically.

Other solution types or multiple load cases will require access to one or more lower-level forms. Several

different analysis examples are considered below.

To perform a multiple load case, linear static analysis, it is necessary only to open the Subcase Select

form. Subcases with the same names as the user-defined load case names and with appropriate defaults

can be selected for inclusion in the job. If a change to one or more parameters for a subcase is desired

(e.g., to change an output request), the Subcases... form must be accessed. Then it is simple to select a

subcase and bring up the appropriate form (e.g., Output Requests) to make changes.

For other analysis types (e.g., Normal Modes), the first step is to bring up the Solution Type form and

make the appropriate selection. A lower-level Solution Parameters form can be accessed from the

Solution Type form to change parameters that affect the overall analysis. Just as for the linear static case,

subcases are automatically created for each defined load case. These can be selected on the Subcase

Select form or modified on the Subcases form.

254 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Review of the Analysis Form

In the Patran MD Nastran Interface, a subcase can be thought of as a Patran load case with some

additional parameters (e.g., Output Requests) associated with it. This association is further strengthened

since the default subcases are created for each load case and have the same name as their associated load

case. In the rest of this document, the terms load case and subcase will generally be used interchangeably.

When a specific form is referenced, Load case and Subcase will be capitalized.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 255

Translation Parameters

Translation parameters define output file formats, numerical tolerances, processing options, numbering

offsets, and external include files.

256 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Translation Parameters

• Numerical - determines if two real values are equal.

• Writing determines if a value is approximately zero when generating a

Bulk Data entry field.

Bulk Data Format • Sorted Bulk Data - Sorts Bulk Data entries alphabetically.

• Card Format - Determines whether the real number can be written to a

standard (8 character) NASTRAN field or to a double (16 character)

NASTRAN field.

• Write Stored Precision - When ON it writes all data as double precision if

the data double precision information.

• Precision Control Options - Specifies where to round off a grid point

coordinate, material, property, or other entity value before its written out to

the bdf file. For example if this value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398

will be written out as 1.34. This option has been implemented for entities:

Grids, Coordinate Frames, MPCs, LBCs, Materials and Properties.

Node Coordinates Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates.

Coordinate Frame Coordinates Defines which coordinate frame is used when generating the grid coordinates.

This can be set to reference frame, analysis frame, or global. This should not

affect the analysis. It only changes the method used in the grid creation. This

determines which coordinate frame is referenced in the CP field of the GRID

entry.

MD Nastran Version Specifies the version of MD Nastran. The version specified here is used for

two purposes: to create the full name of the ALTER file to be used, and to

determine which Solution Sequence to use. Use only whole numbers and

letters; for example, 66a, 67 and 68; 67.5 is the same as 67. This version

number can be overridden by setting the environment variable

“NASTRAN_VERSION”.

Number of Tasks Represents the number of processors to be used to run an analysis. It is

assumed that the environment is configured for distributed parallel processing.

Write Properties on Element Specifies that properties will be written to the element entries for all elements

Entries where it is allowed in MD Nastran.

Write Continuation Markers This option is OFF by default. This option can be turned ON to write

continuation markers for Bulk Data entries.

Write Global Ply IDs When ON, attempts to keep the Global Ply IDs consistent between MD

Nastran and Patran.

Convert CBARs to CBEAMs Converts all CBARs to CBEAMS

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 257

Translation Parameters

Write PARTSuperelement This is ON by default and if ON and superelements are selected (see Select

Superelements, 342 then BEGIN BULK SUPER = id sections are written in to

the input file for each selected superelement. If OFF and superelements are

selected, then SESET entries are written instead to define the superelements.

Geometry Check Checks the element shapes to make sure they are valid. You can set different

warning levels from None to Fatal depending on how crucial the element

shapes are to your model.

Use Iterative Solver Activates the iterative solver for analysis. The analysis manger does not

support this option and must be disabled when using this option.

Ext. Superelement Spec... Subform used for defining superelement specifications.

Numbering Options... Subform used to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned

during translation.

Bulk Data Include File... Prompts you for the filename of the include file.

258 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Translation Parameters

With this form you can define the options for the External Superelements Bulk Data entry. Please see the

MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for more information about External Superelements.

NONE – No EXTSEOUT entry created.

DMIGPCH – Requires an EXTID

MATRIXDB

DMIGDB

DMIGOP2

EXTID method.

Numbering Options

This form is activated by the Numbering Options button on the Translation Parameters form. It allows

the user to indicate offsets for all IDS to be automatically assigned during translation. For example, if the

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 259

Translation Parameters

user types 100 into the Element Properties Offset box, the numbering of element properties in the

resulting NASTRAN input file will begin at 101.

specify the continuation of the mnemonic format

used on multiple line, Bulk Data entries.

recognition of IDs encoded into the name of any

named entity, such as a material.

only if, the name of the entity is an actual number

like “105.” This option is ON by default.

Beginning Number will recognize an ID if the

number begins the name, such as

“52_shell_property.” This option is OFF by default.

Trailing Number will recognize an ID if it trails the

name, such as “shell_property_52.” This option is

OFF by default.

Encoded Syntax will recognize an ID if it directly

follows the first occurrence of the specified syntax.

For example, with this option activated and the

specified syntax set to “.”, the ID assigned to a

material given the name “Steel_1027.32” would be

32.

Note that both the Patran Neutral file reader and the Patran MD Nastran input file reader preserve the IDs

of named entities with a “.” syntax, so that a NASTRAN PSHELL record of ID 12 will be assigned the

name “PSHELL.12.” This last option allows great continuity between input model data and output model

data. This option is ON by default and the default Syntax Marker is “.”.

260 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Translation Parameters

Select File

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 261

Solution Types

The Solution Type form defines the type of analysis and Solution Parameters. Your choice for the

Solution Type will in turn affect additional forms you complete for Solution Parameters, 267, Subcase

Parameters, 347, and Output Requests, 405. See Table 3-1.

Click on the Analysis Application button.

262 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Types

On the Analysis Application form, click Solution Type... and select the Solution Type from the list of

available Solution Types.

For Analysis Type Explicit Nonlinear:

• Linear Static Selects Solution Sequence (SOL) 101, 114, 1, or 47 depending on the

selected Solution Parameters. You may select one or more subcases in

SOLs 1 and 101.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 263

Solution Types

Nastran. Version 66 and below yields SOL 66, and Version 67 and above

yields SOL 106. You may select one or more subcases.

• Normal Modes Selects Solution Sequence 103, 115, 3, or 48 depending on the Solution

Parameters. You may select only one subcase.

• Buckling Selects Solution Sequence 105, 77, or 5 depending on the selected Solution

Parameters. Only one subcase may be selected that defines the static

preload. The buckling subcase is automatically generated. The output

requests for this Solution Type are applied to the static preload subcase. The

default output requests for the buckling subcase are displacements and

constraint forces.

• Complex Eigenvalue Selects Solution Sequence 107, 110, 28, or 29 depending on the selected

Solution Parameters. You may select only one subcase.

• Frequency Response Selects Solution Sequence 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 depending on the

selected Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for

Solution Sequences 118, 26, or 30. For Solution Sequences 108 or 111,

multiple subcases may be selected.

• Transient Response Selects Solution Sequence 109, 112, 27, or 31 depending on the selected

Solution Parameters. You may specify only one subcase for Solution

Sequences 27 or 31. For Solutions Sequences 109 or 112, multiple subcases

may be selected.

• Nonlinear Transient Selects Solution Sequence 99 or 129, depending on the MD Nastran

Version. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99; Version 67 and above yields

SOL 129. You may select only one subcase.

• Implicit Nonlinear Selects Solution Sequence 400 or 600 (depending on “SOL400RUN*

toggle).

• DDAM Solution Selects Solution Sequence 187, Dynamic Design Analysis Method

(DDAM).

• Explicit Nonlinear Selects Solution Sequence 700.

264 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Types

Select ASET/QSET...

a QSET in the input file.

• The ASET toggle creates a user selected unreferenced SPOINTS in the

ASET of input file.

• The QSET toggle creates a user selected number of unreferenced

SPOINTS in the QSET of the input file.

Solution Parameters... Brings up a solution-type-dependent subordinate form that allows you to

specify parameters which apply to the complete solution.

Solution

Database Cyclic Parameter

Solution Type Run Symmetry Formulation MD Nastran Version Settings

Linear Static Off Off -- -- 1

Off On -- -- 47

On Off -- -- 101

On On -- -- 114

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 265

Solution Types

Solution

Database Cyclic Parameter

Solution Type Run Symmetry Formulation MD Nastran Version Settings

Nonlinear Static -- -- -- 66 or Below 66

-- -- -- 67 or Above 106

Normal Modes Off Off -- -- 3

Off On -- -- 48

On Off -- -- 103

On On -- -- 115

Buckling Off Off -- -- 5

On On -- -- 77

On Off -- -- 105

Complex Off -- Direct -- 28

Eigenvalue

Off -- Modal -- 29

On -- Direct -- 107

On -- Modal -- 110

Frequency Off -- Direct -- 26

Response

Off -- Modal -- 30

On Off Direct -- 108

On -- Modal -- 111

On On Direct -- 118

Transient Off -- Direct -- 27

Response

Off -- Modal -- 31

On -- Direct -- 109

On -- Modal -- 112

Nonlinear -- -- -- 66 or Below 99

Transient

-- -- -- 67 or Above 129

Implicit 400

Nonlinear

600

DDAM 2004 187

Solution

Explicit 2005 700

Nonlinear

266 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Direct Text Input

This form is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive Control, Case Control, and

BULK DATA sections of the NASTRAN input file. The input file reader also creates these entries for

any unsupported entries in the input file. If the data is entered by the user the Write to Input Deck toggle

default is ON. If the data comes from the input file reader the default for the Input Deck toggle is OFF.

These entries may be reviewed and edited by the user. If they should be written to any input files

subsequently created by the interface, the appropriate Write to Input Deck toggle should be set to ON.

Text entered into the Case Control section is written to the input file before the first subcase. The Direct

Text Input option on the Subcases form should be used to directly enter text within a subcase definition.

Nastran input would be sent.

Saves the current Resets the form back Resets all four

setting and data for the Clears the current to the data values it forms back to its

four sections and form. had at the last OK. previous value and

closes the form. closes the form.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 267

Solution Parameters

Linear Static

This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type

form when Linear Static is selected. Depending on the setting of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry

parameters, this Solution Type will generate a SOL 101, 114, 1, or 47 input file.

268 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Database Run Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOL 101 or 114) is to be used or

a Rigid Format (SOL 1 or 47). If selected, a Structured Solution Sequence is selected.

Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 114 or 47).

Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain

model singularities.

Inertia Relief Indicates that the inertia relief flags are to be set by including the PARAM, INREL,-

1 command. This flag can only be chosen if Database Run is selected and Cyclic

Symmetry is disabled. If inertia relief is selected, a node-ID for weight generation

must be selected. A PARAM, GRDPNT and a SUPORT command will be written to

the input file using the same node-ID selected for weight generation. The SUPORT

entry will specify all 6 degrees of freedom.

Alternate Reduction Indicates that an alternate method of performing the static condensation is desired.

The PARAM, ALTRED,YES command is included if selected and if Database Run is

also selected

SOL 600 Run Indicates a SOL 600 run.

Contact Parameters Same as the contact parameters available for the Implicit Nonlinear solution type.

Only used with linear contact capability.

Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface

based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.

Tolerance Angle

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the

setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or

Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to

-1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.

This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter

can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities

and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 269

Solution Parameters

Default Initial Defines the Default Initial Temperature: TEMPD value for subcase entry

Temperature TEMP(INITIAL)

Default Load Temperature Defines the Default Load Temperature: Sets the TEMPD value for the subcase entry

TEMP(LOAD) subcase entry.

Rigid Element Type: The Rigid element type optionmenu presents three different types of rigid elements,

corresponding to the three possible values for the Nastran RIGID= case control. They

are:

• LINEAR: Selects linear rigid elements, which are the rigid elements that

have been available in MD Nastran since its inception.

• LAGR: Selects the new Lagrange rigid elements with the Lagrange multplier

method.

• LGELIM: Selects the new Lagrange rigid elements with the Lagrange

elimination method.

See the Nastran quick reference quide for more details.

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use

with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

The table outlines the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry selections, and the SOL types that will be

used.

On Off 101

On On 114

Off Off 1

Off On 47

Nonlinear Static

This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type

form, when Nonlinear Static is selected. If the MD Nastran version specified is Version 66 or lower, then

Solution Sequence (SOL) 66 will be employed. However, if the MD Nastran version specified is version

67 or higher, then Solution Sequence 106 will be employed except as described below. For more

270 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

information about specification of the MD Nastran version number, see the Translation Parameters, 255

form.

model singularities.

cause a difference in the formulation of the

stiffness matrix, may be encountered.

Therefore, the stiffness matrix may need to

be periodically recomputed based on the

displaced shape.

applied forces will remain aligned with the

deformed part rather than maintaining their

global orientation. This can only be selected

if Large Displacements is also selected.

Static is 106, but can be changed to any one

of the following if desired: 400, 600, 700.

Only features of 106 are used in any case.

For specific features particular to 600 or 700,

please use the Implicit Nonlinear type or set

the Analysis Type to Explicit Nonlinear,

respectively.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 271

Solution Parameters

The following table outlines the selections for Large Displacements and Follower Forces, and the altered

LGDISP parameter setting for each.

Off On -1

On On 1

On Off 2

This is a list of the data input, available for defining the Nonlinear Static Solution Parameters, that were

not shown on the previous page.

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the

setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or

Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to

-1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.

This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter

can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities

and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use

with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

272 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Normal Modes

This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when

Normal Modes is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 103, 115, 3, or 48 input file, depending on

the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters below.

unless Cyclic Symmetry is on. If the version is Version

Š 68 and the solution sequence is SOL 103, then

these controls are selectable on the Normal Modes

Subcase Parameters, 354 form.

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL

type for each. Indicates whether a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 103 or 115) is to be used, or a

Rigid Format (SOL 3 or 48). If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence will be selected.

On Off 103

On On 115

Off Off 3

Off On 48

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 273

Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input, available for defining the Normal Modes Solution Parameters, that were not

shown on the previous page.

Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part (SOL 115 or 48).

Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain

model singularities.

SOL 600 Run Select this to perform a SOL 600 analysis.

Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO

to the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The

Computation default is to calculate residual vectors.

Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface

based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.

Tolerance Angle

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the

setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled

or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be

set to -1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print

file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This

parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point

singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run (used to prevent runaway jobs). This defines the setting of the TIME Executive

Control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

Default Inital Temperature Specify the initial temperature.

Rigid Element Type There are three ways to define a rigid element. They are 1) Linear, 2) Lagrangian,

or 3) Lgelim.

Max p-Adaptive Cycles Specify the maximum number of p-Adaptive cycles.

274 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

• Dynamic Reduction Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic

reduction controls.

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to

use with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format,

338.

This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Normal Modes,

Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. It also appears when the Real

Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameter form. Use this

form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any

one of the following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens,

Modified Householder, Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If

this selection is set to Lanczos, an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise,

this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

frequencies to be examined. These are the F1

and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the

V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

eigenvalues to be located. This parameter can

only be specified if Extraction Method is set to

Enhanced Inverse Power or Inverse Power.

This is the NE field on the EIGR Bulk Data

entry.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 275

Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on

the previous page.

Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field on

the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 and 3.

This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is

the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can

take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be

specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM

field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if

Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if

Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This

can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot

be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on the EIGR

Bulk Data entry.

276 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Dynamic Reduction button is selected on the Normal Modes,

Complex Eigenvalue, Frequency Response, or Transient Response Solution Parameters forms. Use this

form to create the DYNRED Bulk Data entry.

dynamic reduction is desired.

considered when performing dynamic

reduction. This parameter can only be

selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction

is set to ON. This is the FMAX field.

selecting coordinates. This parameter

can be set to either Automatic or

Manual. This parameter can only be

selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction

is set to ON. This determines if the

program will automatically select the

number of generalized coordinates.

Indicates the number of scalar points that must be retained in this dynamic reduction. This

parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON and Method of

Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. The Application Preference will automatically create

this many SPOINTs, and place them in the a-set and the q-set.

Defines the number of generalized coordinates to be included in the dynamic reduction.

This parameter can only be selected if Perform Dynamic Reduction is set to ON, and

Method of Coordinate Selection is set to Manual. This is the NQDES field.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 277

Solution Parameters

Buckling

This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when

Buckling is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 105, 77, or 5 input file, depending on the setting

of the Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry parameters.

constrain model singularities.

Sequence (SOL 105) is to be used or a

Rigid Format or unstructured Solution

Sequence (SOL 5 or 77). If Database Run

is selected, a Structured Solution

Sequence will be selected.

cyclically repeating part.

274.

278 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Cyclic Symmetry, and the altered SOL

type for each.

On Off 105

On On 77

Off Off 5

This is a list of data input available for defining the Buckling Solution Parameters that were not shown

on the previous page.

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the

setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or

Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to

-1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.

This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter

can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities

and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

• Eigenvalue Extraction Brings up the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the eigenvalue

extraction controls.

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use

with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 279

Solution Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Eigenvalue Extraction button is selected on the Buckling

Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create either EIGB or EIGRL Bulk Data entries, depending

on the selected extraction method.

Defines the method to use to extract the buckling eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the

following: Lanczos, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If Lanczos is selected, an EIGRL entry will be

created. If Inverse Power or Enhanced Inverse Power are selected, and EIGB entry will be created with the

METHOD field set to either INV or SINV specified, respectively.

eigenvalues to be examined. These are the L1 and

L2 fields on the EIGB entry or the V1 and V2 fields

on the EIGRL entry.

to be located. This parameter can only be specified

if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power. This is

the NEP field on the EIGB entry.

computed. This value can only be selected if

Extraction Methods set to Lanczos. This is the

NP field on the EIGRL entry.

280 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input, available for defining the Buckling Eigenvalue Extraction, that was not shown

on the previous page.

Number of Desired Positive Roots Indicates the limit to how many positive eigenvalues to be computed. This

value can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or

Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDP field on the EIGB entry.

Number of Desired Negative Roots Indicates the limit to how many negative eigenvalues to be computed. This

value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or

Enhanced Inverse Power. This is the NDN field on the EIGB entry.

Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value in the

range of 0 through 3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction

Method is set to Lanczos. This is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk

Data entry.

Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This

parameter can take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This parameter

cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the

NORM field on the EIGB entry.

Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected

if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified

if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGB entry.

Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be

used. This, too, can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point.

This parameter cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos.

This is the C field on the EIGB entry.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 281

Solution Parameters

Complex Eigenvalue

This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when

Complex Eigenvalue is selected. When you specify the Database Run and Formulation parameters (from

the Solution Type form), Patran generates a SOL 107, 110, 28, or 29 input file.

274.

276.

282 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type

for each. If you select Database Run, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 107 or 110) will be selected.

If you deselect Database Run a Rigid Format Solution Sequence (SOLs 28 or 29) will be selected.

On Direct 107

On Modal 110

Off Direct 28

Off Modal 29

This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Solution Parameters that was

not shown on the previous page.

Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain

model singularities.

Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO to

the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The default

Computation is to calculate residual vectors.

Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface

based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.

Tolerance Angle

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the

setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or

Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to

-1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.

This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter

can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities

and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 283

Solution Parameters

Default Inital Specify the initial temperature.

Temperature

Default Load Specify load temperature.

Temperature

Rigid Element Type There is one rigid element type, Linear.

Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g.,

PARAM, G, value).

• Complex Eigenvalue Brings up the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the complex

eigenvalue extraction controls.

• Real Eigenvalue Brings up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form for defining the real eigenvalue

extraction controls.

• Dynamic Reduction Brings up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form for defining the dynamic

reduction controls.

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use

with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

284 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Complex Eigenvalue button is selected on the Complex

Eigenvalue Solution Parameters form. Use this form to create an EIGC Bulk Data entry.

eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one

of the following: Complex Lanczos, Upper

Hessenberg, Inverse Power, or Determinate. This

defines the setting of the METHOD field.

lines in the complex plane. These values cannot

be selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper

Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are

the ALPHAAJ fields.

the complex plane. These values cannot be

selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex

Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of

real values. They are the ALPHABJ fields.

Defines the imaginary component of the beginning of lines in the complex plane. These values cannot be

selected if Extraction Method is set to Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the

OMEGAAJ fields.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 285

Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Complex Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown

on the previous page.

Omega of B Points Defines the imaginary component of the end of lines in the complex plane. These

values cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper

Hessenberg. This is a list of real values. They are the OMEGABJ fields.

Width of Regions Defines the width of the region in the complex plane. This value cannot be selected

if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list

of real values. They are the LJ fields.

Estimated Number of Indicates an estimate of the number of eigenvalues to be located within the specified

Roots region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos

or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NEJ fields.

Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed within the specified

region. This value cannot be selected if Extraction Method is set to Complex Lanczos

or Upper Hessenberg. This is a list of integer values. They are the NDJ fields.

Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can

take one of two settings: Maximum or Point. This is the NORM field on the EIGC

entry.

Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This is the G field on the EIGC Bulk

Data entry.

Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used. This

can only be selected if Extraction Method is set to Inverse Power or Determinate. This

is the C field on the EIGC Bulk Data entry.

286 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Frequency Response

This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when

Frequency Response is selected. Patran generates a SOL 108, 111, 118, 26, or 30 input file when you

specify the Database Run, Cyclic Symmetry, and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run, Formulation, and Cyclic Symmetry

parameters, and the altered SOL type for each. If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence

(SOLs 108, 111, 118) will be selected. If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 26 or 30) will be

selected.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 287

Solution Parameters

On Direct Off 108

On Direct On 118

On Modal -- 111

Off Direct -- 26

Off Modal -- 30

This is a list of data input, available for defining the Frequency Response Solution Parameters that were

not shown on the previous page.

Cyclic Symmetry Indicates that this model is a sector of a cyclically repeating part, and the appropriate

flags will be set. This can only be set if Database Run is selected and Formulation is

set to Direct (SOL 118).

Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain

model singularities.

Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO to

the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The default

Computation is to calculate residual vectors.

Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface

based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.

Tolerance Angle

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the

setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or

Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to

-1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.

This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter

can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities

and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

288 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

Default Inital Temperature Specify the initial temperature.

Default Load Temperature Specify load temperature.

Rigid Element Type There is one rigid element type, Linear.

Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g.,

PARAM, G, value).

• Eigenvalue Extraction Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue

extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to

Modal.

• Dynamic Reduction Calls up another form that is used to define the dynamic reduction controls. These

parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to Modal.

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use

with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 289

Solution Parameters

Transient Response

This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when

Transient Response is selected. Patran generates a SOL 109, 112, 27, or 31 input file, when you specify

Database Run and Formulation parameters (from the Solution Type form).

for a "Modal" solution.

290 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

The following table outlines the selections for Database Run and Formulation, and the altered SOL type

for each. If Database Run is selected, a Structured Solution Sequence (SOLs 109, 112) will be selected.

If Database Run is deselected, a Rigid Format (SOLs 27 or 31) will be selected.

On Direct 109

On Modal 112

Off Direct 27

Off Modal 31

This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Solution Parameters that was not shown

on the previous page.

Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will constrain

model singularities.

Residual Vector The Residual Vector Computation toggle writes RESVEC=YES or RESVEC=NO to

the Case Control. This calculates residual vectors due to applied loads. The default

Computation is to calculate residual vectors.

SOL 600 Run Select this to perform a SOL 600 analysis.

SOL 700 Run Select this to perform a SOL 700 analysis. To do this is necessary to use the Direct

method.

Shell Normal Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface

based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.

Tolerance Angle

Mass Calculation Defines how the mass matrix will be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the

setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled or

Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be set to

-1.

Data Deck Echo Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print file.

This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This parameter

can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities

and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 291

Solution Parameters

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

Default Inital Temperature Specify the initial temperature.

Default Load Temperature Specify load temperature.

Rigid Element Type There is one rigid element type, Linear.

Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g.,

PARAM, G, value.)

W3, Damping Factor Defines W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics

of the model.

W4, Damping Factor1

• Eigenvalue Calls up the Real Eigenvalue Extraction form that is used to define the eigenvalue

Extraction extraction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to

Modal.

• Dynamic Reduction Calls up the Dynamic Reduction Parameters form that is used to define the dynamic

reduction controls. These parameters can only be specified if Formulation is set to

Modal.

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use

with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

292 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Nonlinear Transient

This subordinate form appears when Solution Parameters is selected on the Solution Type form when

Nonlinear Transient is selected. Use this form to generate either a SOL 99 or a SOL 129 input file,

depending on the version of MD Nastran indicated on the translation parameter form except as indicated

below. Version 66 and below yields SOL 99 and Version 67 and above yields SOL 129.

Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested, so that MD Nastran will

constrain model singularities.

Transient is 129, but can be changed to any one of

the following if desired: 400, 600, 700. Only features

of 129 are used in any case. For specific features

particular to 600 or 700, please use the Implicit

Nonlinear type or set the Analysis Type to Explicit

Nonlinear, respectively.

MD Nastran. This controls the setting of the

COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set

to either Coupled or Lumped. If set to Coupled,

COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be

set to -1.

printed in theMD Nastran print file. This controls the

setting used for the ECHO Case Control command.

This parameter can have one of three settings:

Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 293

Solution Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Nonlinear Transient Solution Parameters that was

not shown on the previous page.

Plate Rz Stiffness Factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point singularities

and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

Struct. Damping Coeff. Defines a global damping coefficient to applied. This defines the G parameter (e.g.,

PARAM, G, value.)

W3, Damping Factor Define W3 and W4 parameters. These parameters alter the damping characteristics of

the model.

W4, Damping Factor

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use

with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

294 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Implicit Nonlinear

This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type

form when Implicit Nonlinear is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 400 or 600 input file.

Nonlinear is 600. By toggling the “SOL 400

Run” ON, Patran will write a SOL 400 input

file. Not all features of SOL 600 are

accessible using SOL 400, so use with

caution and check your input file and results

carefully.

Contact Parameters... See Contact Parameters Subform, 297.

Direct Text Input... This subform is used to directly enter entries in the File Management, Executive

Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data sections of the MD Nastran input file. See

Direct Text Input, 266.

Restart Parameters... See Restart Parameters Subform, 305.

Advanced Job Control... See Advanced Job Control Subform (SOL 600), 307.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 295

Solution Parameters

Assumed Strain For SOL 600, if ON, (default is ON), places the MARCASUM parameter into the

input file. This forces all elements that can deal with assumed strain to use this

formulation. This improves the bending behavior of Marc elements 3, 7, and 11. For

SOL 400, the NLMOPTS entry is written with the ASSUM option. Again, this is a

global setting and forces all elements that can use this formulation to adopt it.

Constant Dilatation If ON, (default is OFF), places the MARCDILT parameter into the input file. This

will force all elements that can deal with constant dilatation (for nearly

incompressible analysis) to use this formulation. This affects Marc element types 7,

10, 11, 19, and 20 only and recommended for elastic-plastic and creep analysis. (SOL

600 only)

Plane Stress Replaces plane strain elements with plane stress elements. (SOL 600 only)

Reduced Integration Specifies that a lower number of element integration points be used to integrate

exactly. (SOL 600 only)

Creep For SOL 400, writes the NLMOPTS entry with the CREEP option defaults for creep

analysis.

Shell Shear Correction For SOL 400 (only), forces all shell elements using nonlinear formulations to use the

shear correction. This writes the NLMOPTS entry with the TSHEAR option.

SOL 400 Run Use this to select a SOL 400 simulation, instead of a SOL 600 simulation.

Default Initial or Load For SOL 400 allows for specification of a general initial temperature and a general

Temperature loading temperature. TEMPD entries are written for both with Case Control

TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) and TEMPERATURE(LOAD) entries calling out the

corresponding TEMPD entries in the bulk data.

Results Output Format... On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to use

with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format, 338.

296 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Specifies the solver to be used in numerically inverting the system matrix of linear equilibrium equations.

Inconsistent MPCs There are three choices for dealing with problem MPCs, 1) Reorder

(reorder the DOFs that are used to define the problem MPCs), 2) Continue

(continue the analysis with no changes to the MPCs DOFs), or 3) Stop (stop

the analysis).

Solver Type Chooses Direct Profile, Iterative Sparse, Direct Sparse , Hardware Sparse,

Multifrontal Sparse (default), or External Sparse as the solver.

Non-Symmetric Specifies non-symmetric for Solver Type of Direct Profile or Multifrontal

Sparse.

Non-Positive Definite Specifies non-positive definite option valid for all solver types, use ON. On

by default in SOL 600, use Nastran Default. Can un select this option by

using OFF.

Memory Defines the amount of work space in words. This can be left blank and the

translator will automatically determine this based on model size.

Multifrontal Sparse Parameters

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 297

Solution Parameters

• Out-of-Core Threshold For Hardware and Multifrontal Sparse solvers only. Default is 100.

Represents the number of real*4 words in millions of words. Only for SGI

computers running the IRIX operating system.

Bandwidth Optimization Turns on the optimize option for the Direct Profile or Multifrontal Sparse

solvers and uses the Sloan algorithm. Other solvers have their own

optimizer and use it by default.

Defines options for detecting and handling contact.

298 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Deformable-Deformable In Double-Sided method, for each contact body pair, nodes of both bodies

Method will be checked for contact. In Single-Sided method, for each contact body

pair, only nodes of the lower-numbered body will be checked for contact.

Results are dependent upon the order in which contact bodies are defined.

Optimize Constraint Equations Use this to decrease the bandwidth of the model.

Contact Detection... See Contact Detection Subform, 299.

Separation... See Separation Subform, 301.

Friction Parameters... See Friction Parameters Subform, 302.

Enable Initial Contact Click on checkbox to activate the capability for control of initial contact.

The initial contact is for creating an MD Nastran entry BCTABLE with ID

= 0 to be used for increment 0. For SOL 600, this causes rigid contact

bodies to be moved so they just touch adjacent flexible contact bodies. For

SOL 101 and 400, a BCTABLE is used with ID = 0, which causes rigid

contact bodies to be moved, as for SOL 600, and/or adjusting the

coordinates of all active nodes on the surface of all deformable BCBODYs

to remove any prestressed condition.

Initial Contact... See Initial Contact Subform, 304.

Penetration Check This controls contact penetration checking, sometimes referred to as the

increment splitting option. Available options are: At End of Increment, Per

Iteration (default), Suppressed (Fixed), Suppressed (Adaptive). At End of

Increment means penetration is checked at the end of a load increment. Per

Iteration means that penetration is checked at the end of every iteration

within an increment. If penetration is detected, increments are split.

Suppress is to suppress this feature for Fixed and Adaptive load stepping

types.

Reduce Printout of This controls reduction of printout of surface definition.

Surface Definition

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 299

Solution Parameters

On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Contact Detection... This form controls general

contact parameters for contact detection.

300 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Distance Tolerance Distance below which a node is considered touching a body (error). Leave the

box blank to have MSC.Marc calculate the tolerance as the smaller of 1/20

element edge length or 1/4 shell thickness.

Bias on Distance Tolerance Contact tolerance BIAS factor. The value should be within the range of zero to

one. Models with shell elements seem to be sensitive to this parameter. You may

need to experiment with this value if you have shell element models that will

not converge. The SOL 600 default is 0.9.

Suppress Bounding Box Check Turn ON this button if you want to suppress bounding box checking. This might

eliminate penetration, but slows down the solution.

Include Outside (Solid Element) When detecting contact of elements (beam/bar, shell, solid elements) use this to

include contact of the outside of the elements. For details refer to the BCPARA

entry (contact parameters) of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for

the BCPARA entry are ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and

ITOPSD (solid).

Include Outside (Rigid Surface) When detecting contact of rigid surfaces use this to include contact of the edges

of the surfaces. For details refer to the BCPARA entry (contact parameters) of

the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCPARA entry are

ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and ITOPSD (solid).

Check Layers For contact bodies composed of shell elements, this option menu chooses the

layers to be checked. Available options are: Top and Bottom, Top Only, Bottom

Only. Check Layers and Ignore Thickness combination enters the appropriate

flag in the 10th field of the 2nd data block.

Ignore Thickness Turn this button ON to ignore shell thickness. Check Layers and Ignore

Thickness combination enters the appropriate flag in the 10th field of the 2nd

data block.

Include Edges Use this to detect contact of edges. There are three options, Beam/Bar, Free and

Hard Shell, or Both. For details refer to the BCPARA entry (contact parameters)

of the MD Nastran QRG. The entries that are used for the BCPARA entry are

ITOPBM (beam/bar), ITOPSH (plate/shell), and ITOPSD (solid).

Activate Quadratic Contact Use this to detect the contact of the edges of quadratic elements (midside

nodes).

Activate 3D Beam-Beam Turn this button ON to activate 3D beam-beam contact. Activate 3D Beam-

Contact Beam Contact enters a one(1) in the 13th field of the 2nd data block. This creates

the MD Nastran Bulk Data entry BCPARA, and uses the entry BEAMP.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 301

Solution Parameters

Separation Subform

On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Separation... This form controls general contact

parameters for contact separation.

Separations is entered in the 6th field of the 2nd data block. Default is 9999.

Retain Value on NCYCLE Turn ON this button if you do not want to reset NCYCLE to zero when separation

occurs. This speeds up the solution, but might result in instabilities. You can not

set this and Suppress Bounding Box simultaneously. Retain Value of NCYCLE

enters a three(3) in field 8 of the 2nd data block.

Increment Specifies whether chattering is allowed or not. Increment and Chattering enters

the appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block.

Chattering Specifies the separation criterion (forces or stresses) and the critical value at

which the separation will take place. Increment and Chattering enters the

appropriate flag in the 9th field of the 2nd data block.

302 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Separation Criterion Specifies in which increment (current or next) the separation is allowed to occur.

Separation Criterion enters a one(1) in the 12th field of the 2nd data block if

separation is based on stresses.

Force Value Force/Stress Value is placed in the 5th field of the 3rd data block.

Stress Value

On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Friction Parameters...

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 303

Solution Parameters

Friction Type Available options for friction Type are: None (default), Shear (for metal forming),

Coulomb (for normal contact), Shear for Rolling, Coulomb for Rolling, Stick-

Slip, Bilinear Shear, and Bilinear Coulomb. The MD Nastran entry BCPARA is

written to the .bdf file, with FTYPE used. Type and Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4,

or 5 in the 4th field of the 2nd data block depending on fiction type, and places a

0 or 1 in the 5th field of the 2rd data block for friction based on nodal forces or

nodal stresses, respectively for Coulomb fiction. Stick-Slip is a Coulomb type

friction.

Method For Coulomb type of friction models (options 2, 4, and 5 above), there are 2

methods for computing friction: Nodal Stress, Nodal Force (default). Type and

Method: places 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 in the 4th field of the 2nd data block depending

on fiction type, and places a 0 or 1 in the 5th field of the 2rd data block for friction

based on nodal forces or nodal stresses, respectively for Coulomb fiction.

Relative Sliding Velocity Critical value for sliding velocity below which surfaces will be simulated as

sticking. Relative Sliding Velocity is placed in the 1st field of the 3rd data block

for all friction models except Stick-Slip.

Transition Region Slip-to-Stick transition region. Transition Region is placed in the 1st field of the

3rd data block for Stick-Slip model.

Multiplier to Friction Friction coefficient multiplier. Multiplier to Friction Coefficient and Friction

Coefficient Force Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data block

respectively for the Stick-Slip friction model.

Friction Force Tolerance Friction Force Tolerance. Multiplier to Friction Coefficient and Friction Force

Tolerance are placed in the 7th and 8th field of the 3rd data block respectively for

the Stick-Slip friction model.

Heat Generation Conversion A factor related to how much heat is generated by the friction process.

Factor

304 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Initial Contact...

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 305

Solution Parameters

Includes a Restart option in the MD Nastran input file. Restarts are only supported for SOL 600 in the

current release.

Restart Type You can Write restart data, Read restart data and Read and Write restart data. The

default is None for no restart data.

Create Continuous Results If when restarting a job, you wish the results form the previous run to be copied

File into the new POST file, then turn this ON. This will place the RESTART or

RESTART LAST options before the POST option in the input file. Otherwise

they are placed after the POST option which flags MSC.Marc not to copy the

results to the new POST file. If you turn this ON, you must have a

restarname.t16 and/or restartname.t19 file in your local directory or

the MSC.Marc analysis will fail.

Last Converged Increment Writes a RESTART LAST instead of a RESTART option. ON by default.

Reauto OFF by default. This places a REAUTO option in the input file. Any additional

data needed for the REAUTO option are extracted from the first Load Step

information for the restart job. Only if the Restart Type is set to Read or Read and

Write is the REAUTO written or the toggle visible to the user.

306 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Restart from Increment Defines the increment to be read from the file specified in the Select Restart File

form. This is entered in the 3rd data field on the 2nd card of the RESTART

option. It is only requested when Restart Type is set to Read or Read and Write.

The last increment on the restart file is used for the RESTART LAST option

when Last Converged Increment is ON.

Increments Between Writing Defines the number of increments between writing data to the restart file. This is

entered in the 2nd data field on the 2nd card of the RESTART option. It is only

requested when Restart Type is set to Write or Read and Write. When Last

Converted Increment is ON, this is the 4th field of the 2nd data block of the

RESTART LAST option.

Select Restart File... This brings up a file browser to select the restart file when the Restart Type is set

to Read or Read and Write. This file is specified on the command line for

invoking the MSC.Marc solver using the -r option.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 307

Solution Parameters

Sets alternate versions of the solver and alternate formats for the results file, for SOL 600 jobs.

Marc Results File Format Specifies the file format for the output from the analysis.

Marc Results File Type Defines the binary output and/or text format of output from the analysis.

Binary is recommended since .t16 files are linarily compatible across

platforms and take up less space.

308 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Use Environment Variables Use to enable the use of environment variables.

Suppress Non-SOLMARC Errors Suppress errors that are not SOL 600 errors.

Submit Marc Job Submit SOL 600 jobs to Marc.

Use Marc License Use this to search for, then use Marc licenses.

Copy Marc Files Make copies of Marc files; for example copy .t16 file.

Filter Marc Text

Delete Marc Files Delete Marc files after the corresponding Patran files are created.

Gradually Release Constraints

Analysis Control Defaults Creates the Nastran Bulk Data entry PARAM, MARCDEF. Its three values

are Nastran Development (recommended by Nastran development; Marc

SHELL_SECT parameter is set to 11), Marc-Mentat (current Marc

standard), Marc Development (recommended by both Marc and Nastran

development).

Marc Submit Command Locates the submit command to run the MSC.Marc analysis (optional). For

Specify Full Command its list box will be un-ghosted.

Domain Decomposition

Domain Decomposition is used to partition the model into seperate parts (domains) for parallel

processing. The Method used to do this is named Domain Decomposition Method (DDM). This form

designates that domain decomposition be done manually, semi-automatically, or automatically, for either

SOL 400 or SOL 600 jobs.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 309

Solution Parameters

310 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Decomposition Method Set this to Automatic if you wish MD Nastran to automatically create the

domains during analysis run time. Set to Semi-Automatic if you wish to

have MSC.Patran automatically break the model into domains which can be

visualized before submittal. Set to Manual to have full control over the

domains. This requires the creation of the groups before they can be

selected here in this form and associated to a domain.

Number of Domains This determines how many domains are to be created. When you change

this number and press the Enter or Return key, the spread sheet updates with

this number of rows. The default is 1. This corresponds to the number of

CPUs desired to run the job. For the Automatic method, this is the only

input that is required and the spreadsheet is not visible.

Model or Current Group This is for choosing a part of the model to decompose for parallel

processing: Model -- decompose all of the model, Current Group --

decompose just the current group. This choice must be consistent with what

part of the model is specified for analysis (Analysis: Analyze / Entire Model

or Selected Group). This is only active if Decomposition Method is set to

Automatic or Semi-Automatic.

Metis Method There are three Methods that can be used to partition the Model or Current

Group into Domains. They are, 1) Nodal Position, 2) Element Topology, or

3) Best (a procedure that accounts for the best of the nodal, element, or

vector type algorithms). This method can only be used if Decomposition

Method is set to Automatic.

Domain Island Removal Using this option causes some parts of disjoint domains (domain islands) to

be combined with adjacent domains. This can only be used if

Decomposition Method is set to Automatic.

Coarse Graph Using this option sometimes produces domain islands (disjoint domains).

This option (the default) is recommended to reduce the time to decompose

the initial global domain. Use this only if there is a definite need for a better

decomposition. This can only be used if Decomposition Method is set to

Automatic.

Single POST File If more than one CPU processor is used to solve the problem, the

seperate/multiple results files can be compiled into a single file for

postprocessing using Single POST File.

Create Click Create to create Domain Information spreadsheet rows. After doing

this the number of rows will equal the value of Number of Domains in the

form. If Decomposition Method is set to Manual, the previously created

group names will be selectable in Select a Group window at the bottom.

Visualize This is used to display groups. Select a group name for the heading Domain

Information under Group. Click Visualize to display just that group. This

can be done for some or all of the groups.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 311

Solution Parameters

Validate This is for validating (checking) that the domains are not disjoint. For two

adjacent domains, the nodes at the interface of the domains must be in both

domains.

Domain Information The window with the definition of each Domain. For a given Domain there

is a corresponding unique Group name.

DDAM

DDAM is an acronym for Dynamic Design Analysis Method, or DDAM is a methodology for analyzing

ship-mounted equipment that the US Navy uses in the event of a near-miss underwater. Most FEA

products follow the DDAM methodology, as does any hand calculation. MSC has made several

improvements to its products that make DDAM easier to use.

To accommodate the special spectrum and summing conventions MSC made several modifications to

MD Nastran. A DMAP alter in MD Nastran puts out data important for a DDAM analysis. A stand-alone

Fortran program reads the MD Nastran data, calculates the spectral data, formats DDAM run

information, and sends data back to MD Nastran for further postprocessing.

MSC’s DDAM has the following capabilities.

• Calculates all three shock directions simultaneously.

• Automatically calculates the appropriate spectra from input of the coefficients.

• Performs the NRL sum.

• Contains modal selection following 3010 Rev 1 convention.

• Provides manual mode selection if needed.

• Provides mode-by-mode output if desired.

• Uses all available MD Nastran elements.

• Provides NRL summed output in MD Nastran OP2 format for use with most postprocessors.

• Offers an alternate coefficient input method is available that avoids using the Fortran program,

but the classified coefficients must be entered directly in the data file.

• Has unlimited model size.

• Uses MSC’s Lanczos Eigenvalue solver for fast solutions.

• All base input points must be rigidly connected to a single grid flagged on a SUPORT entry.

• There is no easy method to handle closely spaced modes as defined by 3010.

• MD Nastran printed output (.f06 file) is not labeled well, and must be used carefully in order to

avoid mistakes. This is especially true of the mode-by-mode output.

• A DDAM data file will not read into Patran/MSC.FEA completely.

312 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

• MD Nastran requires additional input switch to be toggled in Patran in order to plot NRL

summed von Mises and combined beam stresses.

• MD Nastran does not calculate beam and bar shear stresses. They are not included in the von

Mises and combined stresses reported by MD Nastran DDAM.

DDAM in Patran

DDAM in MD Nastran is a process that involves three main parts, and a number of smaller parts. The

entire procedure is accessed from a simple interface in Patran that integrates the process.

• Part 1, Modal Analysis - A modal analysis is run in MD Nastran. This supplies the frequencies,

mode shapes and modal participation for the model.

• Part 2, Spectrum Generation – Using the output from Part 1, you can use a Fortran program to

calculate the shock spectrum. This is based on the DDS-072 or NRL 1396 documents, or you can

manually enter your own spectrum.

• Part 3, Spectrum Application and Data Recovery – The calculated spectrum from Part 2 is

applied to the mode shapes calculated in Part 1, and the results are calculated on a mode-by-

mode basis. The results from this are then summed using an NRL sum to produce results, one set

for each shock direction.

The Patran interface presents you with a selection of options to calculate the spectrum and sum the

results. The options are stored, and when the MD Nastran modal analysis completes, the Fortran program

automatically starts, using the stored options to drive it. MD Nastran automatically resumes after the

completion of the Fortran program and finishes the analysis.

During is process, a number of files will be created that are inputs and outputs from this process, all

named jobname.xxx using the jobname chosen in Patran. The most important files are:

jobname.ddd – the DDAM potions file that drives the Fortran program

jobname.f11 – the modal information needed to calculate the spectrum

jobname.f13 – the calculated spectra information for input back into MD Nastran

jobname.ver – modal verification file

jobname.opw – Nastran OP2 file with the mode shapes

jobname.opx – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for x-shock

jobname.opy – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for y-shock

jobname.opz – Nastran op2 file with the NRL summed results for z-shock

Once the run is complete, you can look over both the results and the modal verification file. If the results

are not as expected or desired, there are a number of more advanced capabilities of this DDAM procedure

for more control over the process. These include some that are on the Patran forms (changes in 80%

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 313

Solution Parameters

criterion, minimum G value) and ones that can be accessed using the Patran Direct Text capability (mode-

by-mode output, specific mode selection).

In order to run DDAM, all of the fixed base points (excitation inputs) in the model must be rigidly

connected to a single point. The MD Nastran RBE2 element is used for this, connecting the independent

node (the SUPORT point) to all of the other fixed base/excitation points (dependent grids) in all 6 degrees

of freedom. This point is flagged for the SUPORT entry in the DDAM setup. It is not necessary that this

point is separated (spatially) from the other input points, you can select one of the base points to be the

SUPORT point, as long as all the excitation points are then connected to it. It is not advisable to have any

other translational constraints in the model, as they will remove modal mass from the model and the 80%

criterion will not necessarily be correct, and the model will have base points that will not be excited. You

may have rotational constraints to hold shafting and to remove plate and bar singularities, as the

rotational components are not used in the DDAM excitation.

No loads or other boundary conditions are needed for the analysis. As per 3010, you need to add

operating loads to the shock loads at the conclusion of the analysis. Set up the model like any other modal

analysis, with the exception of the SUPORT point. Mass and material density are required to obtain

correct mode shapes. The modal analysis parameters are set up on the Subcase Options form, where you

can select the number of desired modes, the lower frequency bound, and an upper frequency bound. The

analysis uses a Lanczos extraction routine with mass normalization, and uses the default Lanczos

debugging information level. You will not have control over these parameters in DDAM.

314 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type

form when DDAM is selected. Use this form to generate a SOL 187 input file.

Automatic Constraints Indicates that an AUTOSPC entry is requested. MD Nastran will automatically

constrain model singularities.

Shell Normal Tol. Angle Indicates that MD Nastran will define grid point normals for a Faceted Shell Surface

based on the Tolerance Angle. This data appears on a PARAM, SNORM entry.

Mass Calculation

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 315

Solution Parameters

• Lumped Defines how the mass matrix is to be treated within MD Nastran. This controls the

• Coupled setting of the COUPMASS parameter. This parameter can be set to either Coupled

or Lumped. If set to Coupled, COUPMASS will be set to +1, otherwise, it will be

set to -1.

Data Deck Echo

• None Indicates how the data file entry images are to be printed in the MD Nastran print

• Sorted file. This controls the setting used for the ECHO Case Control command. This

parameter can have one of three settings: Sorted, Unsorted, or None.

• Unsorted

Plate Rz Stiffness factor Defines the in plane stiffness factor to be applied to shell elements. This defines the

K6ROT parameter. This is an alternate method to suppress the grid point

singularities and is intended primarily for geometric nonlinear analysis.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node id for Wt. Gener Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This is

the GRDPNT parameter.

Default Initial Temperature Defines the Default Initial Temperature: TEMPD value for subcase entry

TEMP(INITIAL)

Default Load Temperature Defines the Default Load Temperature: Sets the TEMPD value for the subcase entry

TEMP(LOAD) subcase entry.

SUPPORT Node Selects the point you have chosen for your base input. Note that this is a required

choice with no default, and that you can only pick one node. If multiple nodes are

entered in the data box, only the first one is used.

Results Output Format On the Results Output Format form you choose which output formats you want to

use with your solution type. For more details, please see Results Output Format,

338.

316 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Explicit Nonlinear

This subordinate form appears when the Solution Parameters button is selected on the Solution Type

form when Explicit Nonlinear is selected under Preferences: Analysis... . Use this form to generate a SOL

700 input file.

Large Displacements Use this to cause the large displacement formulation to be used.

Follower Forces Use this to cause the forces to move (translate and rotate) with the model.

Prestress Option Use this to cause the pre-stresses to be calculated.

Maximum Printed Lines Limits the size of the MD Nastran print file that will be generated. This defines the

setting of the MAXLINES Case Control command.

Maximum Run Time Limits the amount of CPU time expressed in CPU minutes that can be used by this

run. This is used to prevent runaway jobs. This defines the setting of the TIME

Executive Control statement.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 317

Solution Parameters

Wt-Mass Conversion Defines the conversion factor between weight and mass measures. This defines the

setting of the WTMASS parameter.

Node ID for Wt. Gener. Indicates the node ID that is to be used for the Grid Point Weight Generator. This

is the GRDPNT parameter.

SOL 700 Default Settings Either Dytran or Ls-Dyna default settings can be used.

• Sol700 Parameters... Displays the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form that is used for specifing

parameter values for such things as execution control, dynamic relaxation (entry

DAMPGBL), general parameters, contact, and Eulerian parameters. See Sol700

Parameters Subform, 317

• Resultts Output Use this to specify the types of files that are to be written for the SOL 700 analysis.

Format... For example, XDB (jobname.xdb) and Print (jobname.f06).See Results Output

Format, 338

This subordinate form appears when Sol700 Parameters button is selected on the Solution Parameters

form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

318 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Execution Control DYSTATIC, DYBLDTIM, DYINISTEP, DYTSTEPERODE, DYMINSTEP,

Parameters... DYMAXSTEP, DYSTEPFCTL, DYTERMNENDMAS, DYTSTEPDT2MS

Dynamic This is for specifying the entries for the DAMPGBL Bulk Data entry. This is

Relaxation... for defining parameter values for static analysis using dynamic relaxation for

SOL 700 only.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 319

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

General DYLDKND, DYCOWPRD, DYCOWPRP, DYBULKL, DYHRGIHQ,

Parameters... DYRGQH, DYENERGYHGEN, DYSHELLFORM, DYSHTHICK,

DYSHNIP

Contact DYCONSLSFAC, DYCONRWPNAL, DYCONPENOPT,

Parameters... DYCONTHKCHG, DYCONENMASS, DYCONECDT, DYCONIGNORE,

DYCONSKIPTWG

Binary Output DYBEAMIP, DYMAXINT, DYNEIPS, DYNINTSL, DYNEIPH,

Database File DYSTRFLG, DYSIGFLG, DYEPSFLG, DYRLTFLG, DYENGFLG,

Parameters... DYCMPFLG, DYIEVERP, DYDCOMP, DYSHGE, DYSTSSZ,

DYN3THDT

Time History Output This is for specifying the type of output file (Binary, ASCII, Both), and the

Request... Output Time Interval.

Hourglass Setting... See Hourglass Setting Subform, 319

Merge Rigid Mat... See Merge Rigid Material Subform, 321

Dynamic Relaxation See Dynamic Relaxation for Restart Subform, 323

for Restart...

Damping Per See Damping Per Property Subform, 325

Property...

Rigid Body Switch See Rigid Body Switch and Merge Subform, 327

and Merge...

Eulerian See Eulerian Parameters Subform, 333

Parameters...

SPH Control See SPH Control Parameters Subform, 336

Parameters...

This subordinate form appears when Hourglass Setting button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and

Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available

such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

320 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 321

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Existing Hourglass List of previously created hourglass settings.

Setting

Hourglass Name Specify the name.

Property Type Specify either a Shell (2D) or Solid (3D) element type.

Control Type Choose one of several types of controlling the hourglass effects. The choices

are: 1) Standard LSDyna Viscous (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 2)

Flanagan-Belytschko Viscous (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 3) Flan-Bely.

Visc. + Vol. Integ. (exact volume integration for solid elements) (Property Type

= Solid), 4) Flanagan-Belytschko Stiffness (Property Type = Shell or Solid), 5)

Flan-Bely. Stiff. + Vol. Integ. (exact volume integration for solid elements)

(Property Type = Solid), 6) Flanagan-Bindeman Stiffness (Property Type =

Solid), 7) Fully Integrated Shell (Property Type = Shell). These entries are

defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran Quick Reference

Guide.

Hourglass This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran

Coefficient Quick Reference Guide.

Warping Hourglass This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran

Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.

Bending Hourglass This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran

Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.

Linear Bulk Visc. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran

Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.

Quadr. Bulk Visc. This entry is defined on the HGSUPPR Bulk Data entry in the MD Nastran

Coeff. Quick Reference Guide.

Select Property Set Select a previously created element property. For example, Properties > Create

> 2D > Shell > Options: Explicit PSHELL1 > Input Properties... > Shell

Formulations > HUGHES.

Add Click Add after input all necessary data into the Hourglass Setting form to

create an Existing Hourglass Setting.

Modify Click Modify after input all changed data into the Hourglass Setting form to

update an Existing Hourglass Setting. You must first select the particular

Existing Hourglass Setting.

This subordinate form appears when Merge Rigid Mat button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and

Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available

such as:

322 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 323

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Existing Merged List of previously merged MATRIG materials. MATRIG is an MD Nastran

Materials Bulk Data entry for defining rigid body properties.

Merged Material Specify the name of merged material to be created.

Name

Select Material to be Specify the name of an MATRIG material to merge other MATRIG materials

Merged into into.

Select Materials to Specify the names of MATRIG materials that are to be merged into the merged

be Merged material whos name is specified under Merged Material Name.

Add Click Add after input all necessary data into the Rigid Materials form to create

an Existing Merged Materials.

Modify Click Modify after input all changed data into the Rigid Materials form to

update an Existing Merged Materials. You must first select the particular

Existing Merged Materials.

This subordinate form appears when Dynamic Relaxation for Restart button is selected on the Sol700

Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where

Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

324 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Relaxation Use this to not use (None Active) or use (Activated Relaxation) relaxation in

performing the simulation.

[Termination Time] The time to stop the simulation. This is optional ([ ]).

Convergence Specify convergence tolerance.

Tolerance

Number of Specify the maximum number of iterations.

Iterations

Papadrakakis Auto Click the checkbox to specify that convergence control is to be automatic

Control using the Papadrakakis method.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 325

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Papadrakakis To use this it is necessary to not select Papadrakakis Auto Control.

Convergence

Tolerance

Relaxation Factor Specify the value of the Relaxation Factor.

Time step scale Specify the value of the Time step scale Factor.

Factor

This subordinate form appears when Damping Per Property button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters

and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is

available such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

326 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Damping Type Select either Property (use property) or Stiffness (use Rayleigh damping).

System Damping Select a time dependent field under Time Dependent Field. This field will be

Constant Table multiplied by the Scalar Factor for Load Curve entry. The (X,Y,Z) Trans.

Damping Forces and (X,Y,Z) Rot. Damping Moments entries (all of these form

a 6 component load vector) are multiplied by the scaled time dependent field.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 327

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Time Dependent Select a Field, with it being entered into the System Damping Constant Table

Field list box. For example, select the field named damping_vs_time under Time

Dependent Field. For System Damping Constant Table f:damping_vs_time

appears.

Scale Factor for Specify the scale factor that will multiply the Time Dependent Field specified

Load Curve under System Damping Constant Table.

X Trans. Damping Scale factor for X translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system

Forces directions.

Y Trans. Damping Scale factor for Y translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system

Forces directions.

Z Trans. Damping Scale factor for Z translation damping forces, in the global coordinate system

Forces directions.

X Rot. Damping Scale factor for X rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system

Moments directions.

Y Rot. Damping Scale factor for Y rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system

Moments directions.

Z Rot. Damping Scale factor for Z rotation damping moments, in the global coordinate system

Moments directions.

Rayleigh Damping Specify the scalar coefficient () that the global stiffness matrix is multiplied

Coeff. by to obtain the Rayleigh damping matrix.

This subordinate form appears when Rigid Body Switch and Merge button is selected on the Sol700

Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where

Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

328 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Option Only option is At Start (D2R0000).

Existing Merged List of deformable body and rigid body properties that have already been merged.

Properties

Merged Body Name Specify the name of the Existing Merged Properties entry to be created.

Deformable Select an entry under Deformable Property

Property

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 329

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Master Rigid Select an entry under Master Rigid Property

Property

Add Click Add to create an entry under Existing Merged Properties.

Modify Click Modify to save the changed selections under Deformable Property and Master

Rigid Property to update an Existing Merged Properties. You must first select the

particular Existing Merged Properties.

Define Set of Parts to See Define Set of Parts to be Switched Subform, 330

be Switched

Define Inertial See Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body Subform, 332

Properties of Rigid

Body

330 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

This subordinate form appears when Define Set of Parts to be Switched button is selected on the Rigid

or Deformable Parts Switching form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where

Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 331

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Option Only option is At Stage (D2RAUTO).

Existing Merged List of deformable body and rigid body properties that have already been merged.

Properties

Merged Body Name Specify the name of the Existing Merged Properties entry to be created.

Deformable Select an entry under Deformable Property.

Property

Master Rigid Select an entry under Master Rigid Property. For example, a 2D Shell Element Property

Property created using an Isotropic (SOL 700) Rigid MATRIG material.

Add Click Add to create an entry under Existing Merged Properties.

Modify Click Modify to save the changed selections under Deformable Property and Master Rigid

Property to update an Existing Merged Properties. You must first select the particular

Existing Merged Properties.

Starting Switch Time Specify the time to switch the deformable and rigid properties.

Ending Switch Time Specify the time to terminate the switching of the deformable and rigid properties.

Delay Period Specify the time delay ( for switching.

Rigid Wall/Contact Specify the surface numbers for rigid walls/surfaces that are to contact.

Surf Number

Related Switch Set

Max. Permited Time Specify the maximum time step.

Step Size

Number of Specify the number of deformable parts that will be switched to rigid parts.

Deformable Parts to

Rigid

Number of Rigid Specify the number of rigid parts that will be switched to deformable parts.

Parts to Deformable

Activation Code Select one of the five flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2, 4) EQ.3, or 5) EQ.4.

Switch

Pair of Related Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.-1.

Switches

Nodal Rigid Body Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.

Activation Flag

Nodal Constraint Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.

Activation Flag

Rigid Wall Select one of the three flags, 1) EQ.0, 2) EQ.1, 3) EQ.2.

Activation Flag

332 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

This subordinate form appears when Define Inertial Properties of Rigid Body button is selected on the

Rigid or Deformable Parts Switching form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type

where Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 333

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Option Only option is New Rigid Props. (D2RINNER).

Master Rigid Select a Master Rigid Property. For example, a 2D Shell Element Property

Property created using an Isotropic (SOL 700) Rigid MATRIG material.

X Coord of Center of X coordinate of center of mass.

Mass

Y Coord of Center of Y coordinate of center of mass.

Mass

Z Coord of Center of Z coordinate of center of mass.

Mass

Translational Mass Scalar mass value for translation, not rotation.

XX Comp. of Inertia XX (1,1) component of inertia tensor matrix.

Tensor (IXX)

XY Comp. of Inertia XY (1,2) component of inertia tensor matrix.

Tensor (IXY)

XZComp. of Inertia XZ (1,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.

Tensor (IXZ)

YY Comp. of Inertia YY (2,2) component of inertia tensor matrix.

Tensor (IYY)

YZ Comp. of Inertia YZ (2,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.

Tensor (IYZ)

ZZ Comp. of Inertia ZZ (3,3) component of inertia tensor matrix.

Tensor (IZZ)

This subordinate form appears when Eulerian Parameters button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and

Extra Data form of either Explicit Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available

such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

334 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Euler Boundary There are three choices, 1) Default, 2) Extrapolate (extrapolate structural mesh pressure to

Treatment Euler elements at solid/fluid boundary), or 3) Element (solid/fluid boundary Euler element

pressure equals the structural element pressure at the solid/fluid boundary).

Multi-Mat. Trans. There are three choices, 1) Default (Impulse), 2) Average (face (surface) velocity is

Scheme averaged simply), or 3) Impulse (face (surface) velocity is impulse weighted).

Material Failure There are three choices, 1) Default (No Fail), 2) Fail (activates transport of fail fraction and

Option thereby keeps track of material that has failed), or 3) No Fail (failed Euler material can

support shear stress again as soon as new material enters the Euler element).

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 335

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Multi-Material The multi-material Eulerian elements use an overflow array to store their material data. This

Array Size array can hold “Multi-Material Array Size” times the number of Eulerian elements. If more

the 10% of the Eulerian elements have more than one material, the value of “Multi-Material

Array Size” must be increased.

Initial Condition A parameter value used to specify the accuracy of the initial conditions in Eulerian elements,

Accuracy when using the geometric shape definition. The parameter value is specified in the input file

using PARAM, MICRO, value.

Mimimum Velocity A parameter value used to specify the minimum velocity. If a calculated velocity is less than

this, it is set to zero (0). It is mainly used to eliminate harmless small values. The parameter

value is specified in the input file using PARAM, VELCUT, value.

Maximum Velocity Specify the maximum velocity for Eulerian and Lagrangian meshes. Although it is not

usually necessary to limit the velocity in Eulerian meshes, there are occasions in regions of

near-vacuous flow where using this can be an advantage. The same thing applies to

Lagrangian meshes, where there is contact. The parameter value is specified in the input file

using PARAM, VELMAX, value, YES/NO. Default is 1.0e10, YES. See the next row for

information on what YES/NO means.

Small Mass Removal Because very high velocities occur mostly in Eulerian elements with very small mass, the

mass in these elements may need to be removed for the analysis to be stable. The above

parameter (PARAM, VELMAX) is used to specify whether or not to eliminate small

masses. YES = eliminate the mass for Eulerian elements for which the velocity is > the value

of VELMAX. NO = do not eliminate the mass for Eulerian elements for which the velocity

is > the value of VELMAX. Default = YES.

Universal Gas Specify the value of the universal gas constant. The parameter value is specified in the input

Constant file using PARAM, UGASC, value.

Single Material Specify the minimum density of single material Eulerian elements. For arbitrary Lagrange-

Elements Euler (ALE) coupling, Eulerian single material elements with strength cannot be used.

Single Mats. with Specify the minimum density of single material Eulerian elements with strength. For

Strength arbitrary Lagrange-Euler (ALE) coupling, Eulerian single material elements with strength

cannot be used.

Multi-Material Specify the minimum density of multi-material Eulerian elements.

Elements

Roe Solver Scheme Specify whether or not to use the Roe solver. The Roe solver accounts for momentum

exchange between Lagrange (structure) and Eulerian material.

Spatial Accuracy There are two schemes that can be used. They are, 1) 1st Order (left and right state variables

are taken as the values the state variables have at the left- and the right-element center), or

2) 2nd Order (left- and right-state variable values at a face by including the left-left and the

right-right element).

Time Integration There are two schemes that can be used. They are, 1) 1st Order, or 2) 2nd Order (three-stage

Scheme time integration scheme).

336 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

This subordinate form appears when SPH Control Parameters (SPH refers to smooth “particle

hydrodynamics”) button is selected on the Sol700 Parameters and Extra Data form of either Explicit

Nonlinear or other structural Solution Type where Sol700 is available such as:

• SOL700,106 - NonLinear Static

• SOL700,109 - Direct Transient Response

• SOL700,129 - NonLinear Transient

.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 337

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Number of Cycles Specify the number of cycles between particle sorting.

Death Time Specify the time when SPH calculations are to be stopped.

Initial Number of Specify the initial number of neighbors per particle. This parameter is for specifying how

Neighbors much memory is to be allocated for arrays during initialization. If the value is positive, the

memory will be dynamically allocated. If the value is negative, the memory allocation will

be static (constant). During the calculation only the closest SPH elements will be considered

as neighbors. Using this option can avoid memory allocation problems.

Particle Approx. There are six theories to choose from, 1) Renormalization (approximation), 2) Symmetric

Theory (formulation), 3) Sym. Renormalization (symmetric renormalization approximation), 4)

Tensor (tensor formulation), 5) Fluid Particle (fluid particle approximation), 6) Fluid

Particle Renorm (fluid particle with renormalization approximation).

Start Time Specify the time to begin particle approximation.

Maximum Velocity Maximum velocity for the SPH particles. Particles whos velocity > this value are

deactivated.

Computation of Select one of the following for two different SPH parts, 1) Particle Approximation

Approx. (approximation is calculated), or 2) No Particle Approximation (approximation is not

calculated; two different SPH materials cannot interact with each other, and penetration is

allowed).

Intergration Type Select 1) 0 ( d h t = 1--- h t div v ), or 2) 1

dt d

dt d

smoothing length.

Smoothing Length Select 1) Bucket (sort based on algorithm; very fast), or 2) Global (computation for all the

Comput. model particles ). This is done during initialization.

Box Type Select either 1) Fixed (the box remains fixed in space), or 2) Moving (the user specifies two

corners of the box and a the time dependent Field to describe the motion of the two corners).

As long as a given SPH particle is in a box, the SPH calculation for the particle is performed

for the box. If the particle leaves the box it was inside, it is deactivated.

Select Box Select the name of a box under Select Box. A box must have been previously created under

Loads/BCs: Create / Box Definition / Nodal.

Tail Vector Specify a vector, <X1 Y1 Z1>, that defines the minimum coordinates of the box

(coordinates of the corner of the box at the minimum location).

338 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

Form Parameters

Head Vector Specify a vector, <X2 Y2 Z2>, that defines the maximum coordinates of the box

(coordinates of the corner of the box at the maximum location).

Motion Vs Time Specify the time dependent Field that defines the motion of the two corners of the box.

Data

Vel./Disp. Flag Specify whether the time dependent Field is a Velocity or Displacement field.

Coord. System Specify the coordinate system that the Tail and Head Vectors are defined in.

With the results output format form you can choose which output formats you want to use with each

solution sequence. The appropriate defaults are set for each solution type. These defaults can be changed

or set in the settings.pcl file.

• OP2 Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran OUTPUT2 file (*.op2). This will place a

PARAM, POST, -1 in the input file.

• XDB Specifies output of data to a MSC.Access database (*.xdb). This will place a PARAM,

POST, 0 in the input file.

• Print Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran print file (*.f06).

• Punch Specifies output of data to a MD Nastran punch file (*.pch).

• MASTER Only When ON, only a .master file is written.

• MASTER/DBALL When ON, both a .master file and a .dball file are written.

• XDB Buffer Size For the XDB results file, defines the buffer size used for accessing results.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 339

Solution Parameters

toward Patran. These commands are also appropriate for PATRAN 2. The “P3 Built

In” option is appropriate only for Database Runs, see Solution Parameters, 267. If

Database Run has been deselected, this option will be set internally to “Alter File”.

• Alter File - specifies the use of an external alter file found on the Patran file path and

following the “msc_v#_sol#.alt” naming convention. See Files, 550 for more

details.

• CADA-X Alter - specifies the use of an LMS CADA-X specific alter file that is

identical to the “Alter File” but with an additional “.lms” extension, for example,

“msc_v67_sol103.alt.lms”.

• P2 Built In - specifies use of MD Nastran internal OUTPUT2 commands geared

toward PATRAN 2.

OUTPUT2 Format Specifies format of the MD Nastran OUTPUT2 (*.op2) files. Use “Text” format when

the resulting OUTPUT2 file must be transported between heterogeneous computer

platforms.

A new variable has been added to the settings.pcl file for results output format defaults per SOL

sequence:

NASTRAN_nnn_DATA_OUTPUT OP2+PUNCH

Where nnn is the solution sequence 101, 400 etc... and OP2+XDB+PRINT+PUNCH+MASTER

+DBALL are the options. This variable is only read from the settings.pcl file when opening a new

database, creating a new job or changing the solution sequence of an existing job. Otherwise the results

output settings are retrieved from the database for an existing job. Note that these variables must be added

to the settings.pcl file by the user and if they do not exist, a standard default is used. Also note that OP2

and XDB are mutually exclusive and both cannot be specified at the same time. The same is true for

MASTER Only and MASTER/DBALL. The settings.pcl file may have one of these variables for each

SOL sequence defined in Patran (>100).

340 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Solution Parameters

ADAMS Preparation

This form is used when you want to prepare a database for an Adams job.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 341

Solution Parameters

• Full Run + MNF

Units • Mass - Your options are: Kilogram, Pound-Mass, Slug, Gram, Ounce-

Mass, Kilo-Pound-Mass, Megagram

• Force - Newton, Pounds-Force, Ounce-Force, Dyne, Kilo-Newton, Kilo-

Pound-Force

• Length - Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter, Kilometer, Inch, Foot, Mile

• Time - Millisecond, Second, Minute, Hour

Craig-Bampton Modes Bounds • Lower Bound

• Upper Bound

Num. Shapes to Adams

ADAMS Debug Print

Strip Face

Create .out(OP2 file) for MSC

Fatigue

Mass Options • Partial

• Constant File

• Full

• None

Output Requests

Transfer Groups to ADAMS

342 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Select Superelements

The superelements created in the FEM menu are displayed in the form below. The superelements for a

subcase are selected by highlighting the name in the listbox. Default button unselects all the

superelements. If Write PART Superelements toggle is ON in the Translation Parameters, 255 form, then

BEGIN BULK SUPER=id sections are written to the input file to define the superelements, otherwise if

this is OFF, SESET entries are used.

In addition to selecting the superelement, you can specify the superelement tree definition. This tell the

analysis which superelement are upstream of others and thus, not directly connected to the residual

structure or superelement zero (SE0). To define an upstream SE relative to its downstream SE, use the

form shown below to fill out the spreadsheet. Put focus in the Downstream databox, select a superelement

from the list, then select the upstream from the list and press Add. This adds a row to the spreadsheet.

Repeat this for every upstream element you need to define. Clicking on a row in the spreadsheet and

clicking Remove will remove the defintion. Downstream SEs can only appear in the speadsheet once.

This writes the SETREE entry.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 343

Select Superelements

SE5 SE6

SE4

In this example, SE1, SE2, & SE3 are upstream of the residual.

SE0 This is not necessary to define in the SE tree. However SE4 is

upstream of SE3 and SE5 & SE6 are upstream of SE4. These

should be defined in the tree.

344 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcases

3.7 Subcases

This form appears when the Subcases... button is selected on the Analysis form. The subcase is the MD

Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output requests, and various other

parameters to be used during part of a complete run.

The Patran MD Nastran interface automatically associates default parameters and output requests with

each Patran load case to create a subcase with the same name as the load case. You can access the Subcase

Parameters... and Output Requests... forms to view or modify these defaults.

Data.

with the current Solution Sequence.

modified is displayed in this databox. It can be

typed in or picked from the Available Subcases

listbox.

database. Only one loadcase can be selected per

subcase. For Normal Modes and Complex

Eigenvalue solution types, free-free runs can be

generated by using an empty load case.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 345

Subcases

Deleting Subcases

To delete subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Delete.

346 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcases

Editing Subcases

To edit global data for subcases, select Subcases from the Analysis form, and set the Action to Global

Data. The following form appears.

associated with the selected subcases. The Edit

Output Request form appears. See Edit Output

Requests Form, 416.

subcases. Cancel closes the form without changes.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 347

Subcase Parameters

The subcase parameters represent the settings in MD Nastran Case Control that take effect within a

subcase and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Currently, the following solution sequences have

subcase parameters associated with them.

Linear Static Subcase Parameters, 348 Model has p-elements Selects the subcase to participate in the

and utilizes Version 68 error analysis calculations in an

SOL 101 adaptive analysis. By default the

subcase participates in the error

analysis.

Nonlinear Static Subcase Parameters, 349 None Selects nonlinear static iteration

parameters.

SOL 106, 66

Nonlinear Transient Subcase Parameters, None Selects nonlinear transient iteration

352 parameters.

SOL 129, 99

Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 354 Version 68 Selects real eigenvalue extraction

parameters.

SOL 103

Implicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters, 365

DDAM Subcase Parameters, 397

Explicit Nonlinear Subcase Parameters, 399

348 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This form is available for solution sequence 101 for MSC.Nastran Version 68 and for models that contain

p-elements. The form allows the inclusion of subcases in the error analysis. This toggle sets the ADACT

Case Control command.

static subcase. If enabled, the “Specify Rotor

Speed” button will be enabled, and can be

selected to display the Rotor Speed Form,

below.

drives the RGYRO case control and Bulk Data

(REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Data

file.

values define the SPDUNIT and SPEED fields of

the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk Data entry. The

SPDHIGH and SPDLOW entries are left blank.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 349

Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form

when the solution type is Nonlinear Static. This form allows the definition of the parameters that control

the interation criteria for a Nonlinear Static analysis. All of the data is part of the NLPARM Bulk Data

entry. If Arc-Length Method is selected, additional data for the NLPCI Bulk Data entry is generated.

Defines the number of increments to be used to apply the full load. This is the NINC field.

stiffness. Matrix updates as the load is

incrementally applied. This parameter can have

one of three settings: Automatic, Semi-

Automatic, or Controlled Iter. This defines the

setting of the KMETHOD field.

matrix update. This is the KSTEP field.

done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field.

Method which is turned OFF by default. The Arc-Length

Method is used to explore post-buckling paths.

parameters.

Activates a normal mode analysis of the prestressed system at the end of the subcase.

350 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Static Nonlinear Iterations that was not shown on the

previous page.

Displacement Error Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If

Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active.

Displacement Tolerance This value defines the tolerance on displacements. The displacement tolerance must

be met between iterations to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected,

a U is entered in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field.

Load Error Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is

selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance

Load Tolerance on load equilibrium. The load equilibrium tolerance must be met between iterations

to define convergence. If Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field.

Load Tolerance is the EPSP field.

Work Error Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is

selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance

Work Tolerance on work error. The work tolerance must be met between iterations to define

convergence. If Work Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work

Tolerance is the EPSW field.

Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case

control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific

temperature LBCs defined

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 351

Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Arc-Length Method button is selected on the Subcase

Parameters form. This form allows the definition of parameters that control the Arc-Length Method. All

of the data is part of the NLPCI Bulk Data entry.

CRIS = Crisfield method (default)

RIKS = Riks method

MRIKS = modified Riks method

ratio between increments for the adaptive

arc-length method 0.0MINALR1.0.

ratio between increments for the adaptive

arc-length method MAXALR1.0.

w=0, displacement control

w>0, combined load and displacements

control

w»1, load control

to be used for the adaptive arc-length

adjustments. This is the DESITER field

Maximum number of controlled increment steps allowed within the subcase. This is the

MXINC field.

352 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters button is selected on the Subcases form

when the solution type is Nonlinear Transient. All of the data is part of the TSTEPNL Bulk Data entry.

of Time Steps for the subcase.

The Mass matrix updates as the load is incrementally

applied. This parameter can have one of three

settings: Adaptive, Automatic, or Time Step. This is

the METHOD field.

matrix update. This can only be set if Matrix Update

Method is set to Time Step. This is the NDT field.

Defines the maximum number of time step bisections to

be used in each matrix update. This can only be set if

Matrix Update Method is set to Adaptive. This is the

MAXBIS field.

done in any given increment. This is the MAXITER field.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 353

Subcase Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Transient Nonlinear Iterations that was not shown

on the previous page.

Displacement Error Indicates whether a displacement convergence criteria should be used. If

Displacement Error is selected, the Displacement Tolerance field becomes active.

Displacement Tolerance This value defines the tolerance on displacements that must be met between

interactions to define convergence. If Displacement Error is selected, a U is entered

in the CONV field. The Displacement Tolerance is the EPSU field.

Load Error Indicates whether a load convergence criteria should be used. If Load Error is

selected, the Load Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance

Load Tolerance on load equilibrium that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If

Load Error is selected, a P is entered in the CONV field. Load Tolerance is the EPSP

field.

Work Error Indicates whether a work convergence criteria should be used. If Work Error is

selected, the Work Tolerance field becomes active. This value defines the tolerance

Work Tolerance on work error that must be met between iterations to define convergence. If Work

Error is selected, a W is entered in the CONV field. Work Tolerance is the EPSW

field.

Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case

control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific

temperature LBCs defined

354 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

The Normal Modes subcase parameters form is available only for Solution 106 for MSC.Nastran Version

70.7. Use this form to create either EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Defines the method to use to extract the real eigenvalues. This parameter can be set to any one of the

following: Lanczos, Automatic Givens, Automatic Householder, Modified Givens, Modified Householder,

Givens, Householder, Enhanced Inverse Power, or Inverse Power. If this is set to Lanczos, this indicates that

an EIGRL Bulk Data entry should be created. Otherwise, this defines the setting of the METHOD field on the

EIGR Bulk Data entry.

of frequencies to be examined. These are the F1

and F2 fields on the EIGR Bulk Data entry or the

V1 and V2 fields on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

to be located. This parameter can only be specified if

Extraction Method is set to Enhanced Inverse Power

or Inverse Power. This is the NE field on the EIGR

Bulk Data entry.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 355

Subcase Parameters

This is a list of data input available for defining the Real Eigenvalue Extraction that was not shown on

the previous page.

Number of Desired Roots Indicates the limit to how many eigenvalues to be computed. This is the ND field

on the EIGR or EIGRL Bulk Data entries.

Diagnostic Output Level Defines the level of desired output. This can take any integer value between 0 and

3. This parameter can only be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This

is the MSGLVL field on the EIGRL Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Method Indicates what type of eigenvalue normalization is to be done. This parameter can

take one of three settings: Mass, Maximum, or Point. This parameter cannot be

specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. Defines the setting of the NORM

field on the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Normalization Point Defines the point to be used in the normalization. This can only be selected if

Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter cannot be specified if

Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the G field on the EIGR Bulk Data

entry.

Normalization Component Defines the degree-of-freedom component at the Normalization Point to be used.

This can only be selected if Normalization Method is set to Point. This parameter

cannot be specified if Extraction Method is set to Lanczos. This is the C field on

the EIGR Bulk Data entry.

Number of Modes in Error Indicates how many modes will participate in the error analysis when the model

Analysis contains p-elements. This data sets the ADACT Case Control command.

Default Load Temperatures Creates TEMPD entry for specified Subcase and is called out using TEMP case

control. This defines temperatures on all grids(modes) that do not have specific

temperature LBCs defined

356 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the

solution type is Complex Eigenvalue.

complex eigenvalue subcase. If enabled, the

“Specify Spin Properties” button will be

enabled, and can be selected to display the

Spinning Properties Form, below.

Rotor dynamics is disabled by default.

Synchronous (default) or

Asynchronous

Defines the SYNCFLG field of the MD Nastran

RGYRO Bulk Data entry.

the RGYRO Case Control and Bulk Data

(REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Data

file.

values define the SPDUNIT, SPDHIGH, and

SPDLOW fields of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk

Data entry. The SPEED value is left lank.

For Asynchronous analyses, a single Speed

databox is presented, defining SPEED field,

while SPDHIGH and SPDLOW are left blank.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 357

Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and the

solution type is Transient Response. Use this form to specify the time step interval and duration for a

transient response analysis. All of the data is part of the TSTEP Bulk Data entry.

This is the subcase parameters form for the Direct Transient and Modal Transient solution.

Damping formulation from the Solution Type

form.

You must enter at least one value of frequency

and damping on the spreadsheet for damping to

occur.

358 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

Use this form to define the time steps in a linear table. Values of Delta-T (Time Increment) must be

positive. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TSTEP for more information.

is optional. If the column is

empty, MD Nastran

assumes the Skip Factor

is 1.

after the selected row.

To insert a row at the

beginning of the table,

select click on the row

label and select "Add

Row".

No. of Time Steps and Delta-T determine the solution points in time. The skip factor defines which of the

solution points you wish to perform results processing on. A skip factor of 1 indicates every time step, 2

indicates every other solution step, etc. Total solution time accumulates in order of entry.

For the example shown, MD Nastran will calculate output at 100 time steps ranging between 1. and 100.

Define Damping

Use this form to define Damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive. Discontinuities

(same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except the first and last

entries in the table. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TABDMP1 for more information.

Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entries in the modal

damping data. This will cause an error in MD Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create

such scenario.

If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued,

even if the damping value for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 359

Subcase Parameters

(two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping value for

those frequencies are the same.

insert a row at the beginning of the table, click on

the row label and select "Add Row".

360 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This subordinate form appears when you select the Subcase Parameters button on the Subcases form and

the solution type is Frequency Response. Use this form to specify the frequencies for a frequency

response analysis. All of the data is part of a FREQi Bulk Data entry.

Frequency Solution

This is the Frequency Subcase Parameter Form.

FREQ,FREQ1,FREQ2, FREQ3, FREQ4

entries.

Damping formulation from the Solution Type form.

least one value of frequency and damping must

be entered on the spreadsheet for damping to

occur.

eigenvalue subcase. If enabled, the “Specify Spin

Properties” button will be enabled, and can be

selected to display the Spinning Properties Form,

below.

Rotor dynamics is disabled by default.

information.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 361

Subcase Parameters

"Add Row" adds a row after the selected row. To insert a row at the beginning of the table,

click on the row label and select "Add Row".

Direct Frequency

When the

Increment type is... Patran...

Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows

will be written to the same FREQ entry. End Freq. and No. Incr. columns are not used.

Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the End Freq.

and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between.

Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression.

Modal Frequency

When the

Increment Type is... Patran...

Discrete Creates a FREQ entry where Start Freq is the frequency value. Multiple Discrete rows

will be written to the same FREQ entry. End Freq, No. Incr. and Cluster/Spread

columns are not used.

362 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

Linear Creates a FREQ1 entry. The Start Freq. will be the first frequency and the End Freq.

and No. Increments will have a linear progression in between. The Cluster/Spread

column is not used.

Logarithmic Creates a FREQ2. Same as Linear, except it will have a logarithmic progression.

Lin. Cluster Creates a FREQ3 with type set to LINEAR. This results in a linear distribution of

solution frequencies between each successive pair of natural modes in the specified

frequency interval. The Cluster value, which has a default of 1.0 is used to bias the

linear distribution of solution frequencies. A smaller cluster value has a closer spacing

towards the center, CLUSTER greater than 1.0 has a closer spacing at the ends of the

frequency range.

Log. Cluster Same as Lin. Cluster except that a logarithmic interpolation is used between the start

and end frequencies.

Lin. Spread Creates a FREQ4 entry. The default value of spread is 0.1. The spread is a fractional

amount specified for each mode. With a spread of 0.3 and No. Incr. of 21, there will be

21 evenly spaced frequencies between 0.7*FN and 1.3*FN, where FN a natural

frequency, for all natural frequencies between the specified “Start Freq” and “End

Freq” values.

Fractional Spread Creates a FREQ5 entry. Enter the Start Frequency and End Frequency. These are the

lower and upper bound for the excitation (solution) frequency domain, respectively. It

is desired to obtain a set of excitation frequencies around and at each natural frequency,

obtained previously from the corresponding modal analysis for this simulation. This is

done by providing a list of fractions; for example {fr_1, fr_2, ..., fr_n}. The list is

“multiplied” by each natural frequency to provide a list of excitation frequencies for

each natural frequency; for example fn_j * {fr_1, fr_2, ..., fr_n}, where fn_j is the jth

natural frequency. The fractions cannot be inserted on a single row of the Define

Frequencies form, but multiple rows must be created, with just one fraction per row.

Define Damping

Use this form to define the damping in a linear table. Values of frequency must be positive.

Discontinuities (same value of frequency, different value of damping) are allowed at all locations except

the first and last entries in the table. See MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide TABDMP1 for more

information.

Modal Damping does not allow a discontinuity to exist as either the first or last entry in the modal

damping data. This will cause an error in MD Nastran. It is strongly recommended that you do not create

such scenario.

If the first and second frequencies (two lowest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued,

even if the damping values for those frequencies are the same. If the last and second to last frequencies

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 363

Subcase Parameters

(two highest frequencies) are the same value, a warning will be issued, even if the damping values for

those frequencies are the same.

insert a row at the beginning of the table, click on

the row label and select "Add Row".

Create a Field checkbox.

click on the Load Data From Field button, then

select the Field.

Presented when Rotor Dynamics is ON and the Specify Spinning Properties button is selected.

364 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

Synchronous (default) or

Asynchronous

Defines the SYNCFLG field of the MD Nastran

RGYRO Bulk Data entry.

the RGYRO Case Dontrol and Bulk Data

(REFROTR field) in the MD Nastran Bulk Data

file.

values define the SPDUNIT, SPDHIGH, and

SPDLOW fields of the MD Nastran RGYRO Bulk

Data entry. The SPEED value is left lank.

For Asynchronous analyses, a single Speed

databox is presented, defining SPEED field,

while SPDHIGH and SPDLOW are left blank.

For Synchronous analyses with Frequency

Dependent Looping OFF, no speed databoxes

are presented, and SPDHIGH, SPDLOW,

SPEED are all left blank. Rather, a “param,

gyroavg,-1” entry is generated. Frequency

Dependent Looping is ON by default.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 365

Subcase Parameters

The type of nonlinear analysis can be changed in each SOL 600 or SOL 400 subcase. To specify this

change, the Subcases form includes an Analysis Type pull-down menu with options for static, normal

modes, buckling, transient dynamic, creep, and body approach analyses. For SOL 400 there is an

additional Analysis Type, complex eigenvalue. In turn, specifying the subcase parameters is dependent

on the Analysis Type selected for the subcase. The following sections define the subcase parameters for

each analysis type.

366 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 400 or 600 static analysis subcase.

Nonlinear Solution Parameters

• Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity to be included

in the subcase.

• Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 367

Subcase Parameters

Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each

iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be

determined.

Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the

equilibrium problem at each load increment.

Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in

the analysis.

Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase.

Break Squeal Parameters For defining parameter values for modeling break squeal for the

subcase. (SOL 400 only).

This subform defines the parameters for a normal modes analysis subcase (SOL 400 and 600 only). See

Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 354 for more information.

For buckling nonlinear analysis the subcase parameters control the eigenvalue extraction techniques and

the range of frequencies to be targeted for extraction. This subform defines the parameters for a buckling

analysis subcase (SOL 400 and 600 only). See Normal Modes Subcase Parameters, 354 for more

information.

368 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a transient dynamic analysis subcase for SOL 600 and SOL 400.

Nonlinear Solution Parameters

• Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity to be included in

the subcase.

• Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 369

Subcase Parameters

Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each

iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be

determined.

Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the

equilibrium problem at each load increment.

Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in

the analysis.

Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase

(SOL 600 only).

370 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 600 and SOL 400 Creep analysis subcase.

• Procedure Defines either Explicit creep formulation or Implicit creep formulation.

• Nonlinear Geometric Effects Defines the type of geometric or material nonlinearity to be included in the

subcase.

• Follower Forces Specifies whether forces will follow displacements.

Increment Type Defines a fixed or adaptive increment method.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 371

Subcase Parameters

• Adaptive Increment Parameters... For adaptive methods, sets boundaries for incrementation.

Load Increment Parameters Defines whether the load increments will be fixed or adapted in each

iteration and the method by which adaptive load increments will be

determined.

Iteration Parameters Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the

equilibrium problem at each load increment.

Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the

analysis.

Active/Deactive Elements Defines groups of elements to be active or deactive for the subcase (SOL

600 only).

Break Squeal Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 600 body approach analysis subcase

• Total Time Places a time step option in the Load Step.

• Synchronized If ON, specifies that when the first rigid body comes into contact, the rest stop

moving.

Contact Table Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analysis.

See Contact Table, 386

372 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

This subform defines the parameters for a SOL 400 (only) complex eigenvalue analysis subcase

Enable Rotor Dynamics Click in checkbox to activate rotor dynamics.

Specify Spinning Properties... Click to access the form for specifying the rotor speed. See Spinning Properties,

Frequency Response, 363

Contact Table... Activates, deactivates, and controls the behavior of contact bodies in the analysis.

See Contact Table, 386

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 373

Subcase Parameters

Load and time step incrementation parameters for Statics and Transient Dynamics appear on this

subordinate form. For other analysis types, this information appears directly on the Solution Parameters

form.

The Load Increment Parameters form differs depending on your designation of a Fixed or Adaptive

Increment Type and whether an arclength method is to be used if you select an Adaptive Incrementation

scheme.

374 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

Arclength Method None

Trial Time Step Size Defines the initial time step size. Default is 1% of Total Time if left blank.

Time Step Scale Factor Indicates load will be allowed to be scaled up by 20% each increment if possible.

Default is 1.2.

Minimum Time Step Indicates the smallest time step that can be used. Default is Trial Time Step / 1000 if

left blank.

Maximum Time Step Indicates the largest time step that can be used. Default is Total Time / 2 if left blank.

Maximum # of Steps Defines the maximum number of time steps. It can be left blank which will default

to the Initial Step Size divided by the Total Time.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 375

Subcase Parameters

Total Time This is the total time of the analysis for a particular step. It defaults to one (1) if left

blank for static load cases. For time dependent load cases, the total time is the length

of time between distinct time points if left blank. Otherwise the actual value is used

(not recommended because it can’t be variable).

# of Steps of Output Indicates that this many increments evenly spaced in time will be place in the output

file. Default is 0 if left blank. Which means all converged increments will be output

(SOL 600 only).

Quasi-static Inertial ON by default.

Damping

Criteria Multiple adaptive load stepping criteria is available. By default, none of this is

necessary. These criteria are described below in Adaptive Load Incrementation

Criteria, 377.

Time Integration Scheme For Transient Dynamics, indicates the time integration scheme to use in dynamic

analysis.

Minimum Iteration per Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on the

Increment Iteration Parameters, 381 form.

Maximum Iteration per Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined on the

Increment Iteration Parameters, 381 form.

Matrix Update Method This is the method for controlling stiffness updates. This is the KMETHOD field on

the NLPARM entry for SOL 400 runs.

Load Increment Parameters for SOL 600 and SOL 400, Creep analysis. The MD Nastran entries used for

this are NLADAPT, NLPARM, and TSTEPNL.

376 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

Creep

Increment Type There are three choices, 1) Fixed, 2) Adaptive, and 3) Adaptive Creep.

Suggested Time Increment The approximate time step.

Total Time The total time for the creep analysis.

Max # of Increment Allowed This is for NSMAX.

Creep Tests This is for RAC.

Relative Strain Tolerance This is for TCSTRN.

Relative Stress Tolerance This is for TCSTRS.

Low Stress Cut-off Tolerance This is for TCOFF.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 377

Subcase Parameters

This for the MD Nastran NLAUTO entry, Parameters for Automatic Load/Time Stepping. (SOL 600

only).

Treat Criteria as: If Limits, sets 3rd field to zero (0) in 3rd data block (default). If Targets, sets field

to one (1). This is for LIMITAR.

Use Automatic Criteria Uses automatic physical criteria if top toggle is ON. Bottom toggle defines what

Continue if not Satisfied happens if the criteria is not met. Both OFF by default. This is for IPHYS.

378 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

Ratio Between Steps: Defines the [Smallest] and [Largest] ratios acceptable between load increments.

For Smallest, default = 0.1, For Largest, default=10.0. This is for RSMALL and

RBIG.

[Number of Cutbacks] Blank by default. default value is 10 if left blank or zero. This is for NCUT.

Increment Criteria Selects the type of criteria to be used.The

labels “XXX Range” and “XXX

Increment Allowed” will change based on

the Increment Criteria selected. This is for

CRITERIA.

Loading Table Instances Determines how loading tables (Use Tables must be ON in the Job Parameters

form) are treated. By default loads are increased or decreased such that they always

Reach Peaks-Valleys Only. If you wish you can Reach All Points in Tables or

Ignore all Points in Tables.

Write Instances to Post File Writes Loading Table Instances to the Post file if toggle is ON. Note that if toggle

is ON, then only those instances are written to the POST file and not all the

increments of the analysis. This is for IDMPFLG.

Nodal Temp. Check There are three choices, 1) Omit Check, 2) Below Finish Temperature (to complete

time period when all node temperatures are < FTEMP), and 3) Above Finish

Temperature (to complete time period when all node temperatures are > FTEMP).

This is for IFINISH.

Finish Temperature The terminal temperature. This is for FTEMP.

Use Criterion For a criteria to be used, this toggle must be turned ON.

“Criterion” Range The first and last fields are zero and 1e20 respectively and cannot change. The

second and third must be the same as well as the 4th/5th and 6th/7th which define

the ranges. The “Criterion” title changes according to the Increment Criterion

chosen.

“Criterion” Increment The “Criterion” title changes according to the Increment Criteria chosen.

Allowed

Select a Group (Optional) You can optionally select a group of elements to which this criterion is to be

applied. No group is selected by default.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 379

Subcase Parameters

Static

Arclength Method Selects the arclength root procedure: Crisfield, Riks/Ramm, Modified

Riks/Ramm, or Crisfield-Modified Riks/Ramm. The default is Modified

Riks/Ram. If None is selected the form updates as shown (p. 373). For

Transient Dynamics, this is the only option available for adaptive load

incrementation.

Automatic Cutback This feature is ON by default. If an increment does not converge, a restart

from the last increment cuts the increment size in half.

Number of Cutbacks This is associated with Automatic Cutback. This parameter determines how

many times a cutback is allowed.

380 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

Initial Fraction of Load This is the fraction of the total load that should be applied in the first iteration

Applied to 1st Increment of the first increment.

Max. Fraction of Load Applied This is the maximum fraction of the load that can be applied in any

in Any Increment increment.

Max/Min Ratio Arc Length Used to define the minimal arclength. The default is 0.01.

/ Initial Arc Length

Max. # of Increments Defines the maximum number of increments. Program will end if this value

is exceeded.

Total Time This is the total time of the analysis for a particular step. It defaults to one

(1) if left blank for static load cases. For time dependent load cases, the total

time is the length of time between distinct time points if left blank.

Otherwise the actual value is used (not recommended because it can’t be

variable).

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 381

Subcase Parameters

Fixed Increment

Parameter Description

Automatic Cutback Applies to Nonlinear Statics only. It is ON by default. If an increment does

not converge, it allows for a restart from the last increment cuts the

increment size in half.

Number of Cutbacks This is associated with Automatic Cutback. This parameter determines how

many times a cutback is allowed.

Number of Increments For Statics and Creep this is the number of increments specified in the

or NLAUTO option. Or for Transient Dynamics defines the number of steps to

Number of Steps use throughout the analysis for Fixed time step type. Default is 10.

Total Time For Statics, this enters the NLAUTO option which is the total time as

defined in this widget. For Transient Dynamics this is the total time.

For Creep, the total time is either placed in the 2nd data block of a CREEP

INCREMENT option or the total time is divided by the Number of

Increments, if this value is present, and the incremental time is written to the

2nd data block of the CREEP option.

Gamma / Beta For Transient Dynamics only. Default is 0.5.

Time Integration Scheme For Transient Dynamics, the Houbolt and Central Difference cannot be

selected. Indicates the time integration scheme to use in dynamic

analysis.Single Step Houbolt is the default.

Minimum Iteration per Increment Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined

on the Iteration Parameters, 381 form.

Maximum Iteration per Increment Enter these values for a SOL 400 run. For SOL 600 these values are defined

on the Iteration Parameters, 381 form.

Matrix Update Method This is the method for controlling stiffness updates. This is the KMETHOD

field on the NLPARM entry for SOL 400 runs.

Iteration Parameters

This subordinate form appears when the Subcase Parameters... / Iteration Parameters... button is selected

for Analysis Type: Static, Transient Dynamics, Creep, ... Subcases form. Unless otherwise specified all

382 Patran Interface to MD Nastran Preference Guide

Subcase Parameters

parameter references apply to the NLSTRAT (SOL600) entry for the form on the left, and NLPARM

(SOL 400) entry for the form on the right .

Proceed if not Converged Forces the analysis to proceed even if the increment did not converge.

Initial Stress Stiffness There are five choices, 1) Full, 2) None, 3) Tensile, 4) Deviatoric, and 5)

Begin Increment.

Non-positive Definite This forces the non-positive definite flag (IKNONPOS param) ON in the

NLSTRAT option. A new NLSTRAT option is written for each step if a

change in this flag has been detected from Subcase to Subcase.

Chapter 3: Running an Analysis 383

Subcase Parameters

Iteration Method Indicates the iteration method (IKMETH param) to be used. This is can be

set to Full Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-

Raphson with Strain Correction, or Secant Method. Full Newton-Raphson

is default.

Max # of Iterations Defines the maximum number of iterations (MAXREC param) allowed for

per Increment convergence in any increment. This number is negative if Proceed if not

Converged is ON from the Solution Parameter form.

Minimum # of Iterations This specifies the minimum number of iterations per Increment (MINREC

param) option. It can be an integer number zero or greater. If this is set

per Increment greater than zero, every increment will perform at least this many

iterations.

Desired # of Iterations Defines the number of desired iterations in an increment (ATRECYC

per Increment param) which is placed on the NLSTRAT option. If the actual number of

iterations is less than this value, this will be used to figure out how much

to increase the load step for the next increment. In a similar manner if the

actual number of iterations is greater than this number (but less than the

Max # of Iterations per Increment, this will be used to decrease the load

step in the next increment. Obviously if Adaptive incrementation is not

specified, this data will not be used.

Matrix Update Method There are six choices for updating the stiffness matrix, 1) Automatic (MD

Nastran automatically selects the most efficient strategy based on

convergence rates), 2) Controlled Iters.(MD Nastran updates the matrix at

every KSTEP interations and at convergence if KSTEP <= MAXITER), 3)

Adaptive, 4) Semi-Automatic (MD Nastran for each load increment (i)

performs a single iteration based upon the new/next load, (ii) updates the

stiffness matrix, and (iii) resumes the normal Automatic option), 5) Full

Newton (MD Nastran updates the stiffness matrix every iteration), and 6)

Pure Full Newton (the same as the Full Newton method, except EPSU = -

0.01, EPSW = -0.01, and MAXLS = 0.0).

Tolerance Method Defines the tolerance method to be used (CONVTYP param). This can be

set to Residual, Incremental Displacement, or Incremental Strain Energy.

Residuals/Displacements If you want the Tolerance Method to use both Residuals and Displacements

to determine convergence set this to And. If you want either one or the

And other to determine convergence, set this to OR. If Tolerance Method is set

Or

to Residual or Displacement, then these two toggles are enabled. Both are

OFF by default. If one is ON, the other is OFF. These toggles work in

combination with Tolerance Method. If both are OFF, then Tolerance

Method determines what is written.

Error Type Indicates the type of error to use (IRELABS param